WO2020073959A1 - Image capturing method, and electronic device - Google Patents
Image capturing method, and electronic device Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2020073959A1 WO2020073959A1 PCT/CN2019/110387 CN2019110387W WO2020073959A1 WO 2020073959 A1 WO2020073959 A1 WO 2020073959A1 CN 2019110387 W CN2019110387 W CN 2019110387W WO 2020073959 A1 WO2020073959 A1 WO 2020073959A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- camera
- electronic device
- wide
- image
- color camera
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Ceased
Links
Images
Classifications
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N23/00—Cameras or camera modules comprising electronic image sensors; Control thereof
- H04N23/60—Control of cameras or camera modules
- H04N23/62—Control of parameters via user interfaces
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N23/00—Cameras or camera modules comprising electronic image sensors; Control thereof
- H04N23/60—Control of cameras or camera modules
- H04N23/63—Control of cameras or camera modules by using electronic viewfinders
- H04N23/631—Graphical user interfaces [GUI] specially adapted for controlling image capture or setting capture parameters
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N23/00—Cameras or camera modules comprising electronic image sensors; Control thereof
- H04N23/60—Control of cameras or camera modules
- H04N23/667—Camera operation mode switching, e.g. between still and video, sport and normal or high- and low-resolution modes
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N23/00—Cameras or camera modules comprising electronic image sensors; Control thereof
- H04N23/60—Control of cameras or camera modules
- H04N23/67—Focus control based on electronic image sensor signals
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N23/00—Cameras or camera modules comprising electronic image sensors; Control thereof
- H04N23/80—Camera processing pipelines; Components thereof
- H04N23/84—Camera processing pipelines; Components thereof for processing colour signals
Definitions
- This embodiment relates to the field of electronic technology, and in particular, to an image capturing method and an electronic device.
- Dual-camera systems can improve imaging quality and imaging function diversity while maintaining a low module height due to their complementary advantages of differentiated advantages.
- mobile phone manufacturers they can not only maintain the thin and light characteristics of mobile phones, but also improve the quality of photos and develop a variety of interesting applications. Therefore, the dual camera system is more and more popular with mobile phone manufacturers and is gradually becoming the current. Standard for all mini phones.
- an electronic device such as a mobile phone takes an image through a dual camera
- the image obtained by the two cameras is simply fused to obtain the final image.
- the shooting scenes are diverse and changeable, and the method of simply fusing the images obtained by the two cameras cannot capture high-quality images under the diverse and changing shooting scenes.
- This embodiment provides an image capturing method and an electronic device, which can switch to different cameras for shooting under different shooting scenes to improve the shooting effect of the image.
- this embodiment uses the following technical solutions:
- the technical solution provides an image capturing method, which is applied to an electronic device with a touch screen.
- the electronic device includes a wide-angle color camera, an ultra-wide-angle color camera, and a telephoto color camera.
- the method includes: after the electronic device detects the first operation of the user for turning on the camera, in response to the first operation, the electronic device displays the shooting interface on the touch screen.
- the electronic device captures the image through the wide-angle color camera, and displays the image captured by the wide-angle color camera on the touch screen.
- the electronic device After the electronic device detects the second operation of the user for instructing zooming, in response to the second operation, the electronic device switches to capturing an image through the ultra-wide-angle color camera or telephoto color camera, and displays the ultra-wide-angle color camera or Image captured by a defocused color camera.
- the user can make a zoom instruction according to the current shooting scene, and the electronic device can automatically switch between the wide-angle color camera, the ultra-wide-angle color camera, and the telephoto color camera according to the user's zoom instruction, so as to use the matching ,
- the camera that can adapt to the current shooting scene can capture and shoot images to obtain better shooting results.
- the shooting interface includes at least one first control for indicating a zoom magnification
- the second operation is a user's preset operation for the first control. Therefore, it is convenient for the user to instruct zooming through the first control.
- the shooting interface includes at least one second control for instructing the camera, and the second operation is a user's preset operation for the second control. Therefore, it is convenient for the user to instruct zooming through the second control.
- the electronic device in response to the second operation, switches to capturing an image through an ultra-wide-angle color camera or a telephoto color camera, including: in response to the second operation, the electronic device determines the zoom magnification K. Among them, if M ⁇ K ⁇ 1, the electronic device switches to capturing images through the ultra-wide-angle color camera. If K ⁇ N, the electronic device switches to capturing the image through the telephoto color camera. In addition, if 1 ⁇ K ⁇ N, the electronic device captures the image through the wide-angle color camera.
- M tan (B / 2) / tan (A / 2)
- N tan (B / 2) / tan (C / 2)
- A is the angle of view of the ultra-wide-angle color camera
- B is the wide-angle color camera
- C is the angle of view of the telephoto color camera
- A is greater than B
- B is greater than C.
- the electronic device may determine the zoom magnification according to the second operation of the user, and determine a corresponding camera according to the zoom magnification, so as to switch to the camera to shoot.
- the electronic device in response to the second operation, switches to capturing an image through an ultra-wide-angle color camera or a telephoto color camera, including: in response to the second operation, the electronic device determines the zoom magnification K. If M ⁇ K ⁇ 1, the electronic device switches to capturing images through the ultra-wide-angle color camera and capturing images through the wide-angle color camera and / or telephoto color camera. If K ⁇ N, the electronic device switches to capturing images through a telephoto color camera, and capturing images through a wide-angle color camera and / or ultra-wide-angle color camera.
- the electronic device may determine the zoom magnification according to the second operation of the user, and determine the corresponding multiple cameras according to the zoom magnification, so as to shoot through the multiple cameras.
- the method before the electronic device detects the second operation of the user to instruct zooming, the method further includes: if the camera currently used to capture the image is a wide-angle color camera or a telephoto color camera, wait If the distance between the shooting object and the electronic device is less than or equal to the first preset value, the electronic device automatically switches to capturing the image through the ultra-wide-angle color camera. If the current camera for capturing images is a wide-angle color camera or an ultra-wide-angle color camera, and the distance between the object to be photographed and the electronic device is greater than or equal to the second preset value, the electronic device automatically switches to capturing the image through the telephoto color camera.
- the second preset value is greater than the first preset value.
- the electronic device can automatically switch to the camera that matches the current distance for shooting according to the distance between the object to be photographed and the electronic device, so as to obtain a better shooting effect.
- the distance between the object to be photographed and the electronic device when the distance between the object to be photographed and the electronic device is less than or equal to the first preset value, it may currently be in macro mode; the distance between the object to be photographed and the electronic device is less than the second preset value, which may be currently in the distant view mode.
- the method before the electronic device detects the second operation for the user to instruct zooming, the method further includes: if the camera currently used to capture the image is a wide-angle color camera or a telephoto color camera, and The captured image displayed on the touch screen includes a part of the object to be photographed, and the electronic device automatically switches to capturing the image through the ultra-wide-angle color camera.
- the electronic device can Automatically switch to an ultra-wide-angle color camera with a larger field of view to capture images.
- the method before the electronic device detects the second operation for the user to instruct zooming, the method further includes: the electronic device generating the first composition according to the first image captured by the camera currently used to capture the image . If the camera currently used to capture the image is a wide-angle color camera or a telephoto color camera, the electronic device also captures the second image through the ultra-wide-angle color camera. The electronic device generates a second composition based on the second image. If the first composition does not match the second composition, the electronic device prompts the user whether to switch the camera. If an operation for instructing the user to switch the camera is detected, the electronic device prompts the user to shoot according to the second image and the second composition.
- the electronic device may use the ultra-wide-angle color camera with the largest field of view of the captured screen to generate a composition, and verify the first composition. If the first composition matches the second composition, it indicates that the first composition is reasonable, and the user can be prompted to shoot according to the first composition; if the second composition matches the second composition, it indicates that the first composition is unreasonable, and the electronic device can The second composition prompts the user to shoot.
- the method further includes: if the camera currently used to capture the image is a wide-angle color camera or a telephoto color camera, and the object to be photographed is a landscape, then the electronic device The camera and long wide-angle color camera capture images.
- the electronic device synthesizes the image captured by the camera currently used to capture the image and the image captured by the long wide-angle color camera, and the electronic device displays the synthesized image on the touch screen.
- the electronic device can capture a larger field of view while using the current wide-angle color camera's wider field of view feature while capturing images using the camera currently used to capture the image Landscape pictures within the range, thus helping users record pictures of more open landscapes.
- the method further includes: after the electronic device detects the third operation used by the user to instruct recording, displaying the shooting interface in the recording mode in response to the third operation.
- the electronic device automatically zooms according to the size of the object to be photographed on the shooting interface, or according to the distance between the object to be photographed and the electronic device, and the electronic device automatically switches the camera used to capture the image according to the zoom result.
- the electronic device can automatically zoom in real time according to the object to be photographed during the recording process, and switch the camera used to capture the image in real time.
- the method further includes: the electronic device prompts the user on the shooting interface of the camera currently used to capture the image, the current zoom magnification, or the current shooting mode.
- the technical solution provides an image capturing method, which is applied to an electronic device with a touch screen.
- the electronic device includes a wide-angle color camera, an ultra-wide-angle color camera, and a telephoto color camera.
- the method includes: after detecting the first operation for opening the camera by the user, the electronic device displays a shooting interface on the touch screen in response to the first operation.
- Electronic devices use wide-angle color cameras to capture images.
- the electronic device displays the image captured by the wide-angle color camera on the touch screen.
- a second operation of the user for instructing the ultra-wide-angle color camera is detected, in response to the second operation, the electronic device switches to the ultra-wide-angle color camera to capture an image.
- the electronic device displays the image captured by the ultra-wide-angle color camera on the touch screen. If a third operation by the user for instructing the telephoto color camera is detected, in response to the third operation, the electronic device switches to the telephoto color camera to capture the image. The electronic device displays the image captured by the telephoto color camera on the touch screen.
- the user can use the camera suitable for the current shooting scene according to the current shooting scene instruction, and the electronic device can switch between the wide-angle color camera, the ultra-wide-angle color camera, and the telephoto color camera according to the user's instruction, so that The camera that shoots the scene captures and shoots images to obtain better shooting results.
- the technical solution provides an image capturing method.
- the electronic device includes a wide-angle color camera, an ultra-wide-angle color camera, and a telephoto color camera.
- the method includes: the electronic device detects a first operation by the user for turning on the camera.
- the electronic device displays the shooting interface on the touch screen in response to the first operation. If the distance between the object to be photographed and the electronic device is less than or equal to the first preset value, the electronic device captures the image through the ultra-wide-angle color camera.
- the electronic device displays the image captured by the ultra-wide-angle color camera on the touch screen.
- the electronic device captures the image through the telephoto color camera, and the second preset value is greater than the first preset value.
- the electronic device displays the image captured by the telephoto color camera on the touch screen. If the distance between the object to be photographed and the electronic device is greater than the first preset value and less than the second preset value, the electronic device captures the image through the ultra-wide-angle color camera. The electronic device displays the image captured by the wide-angle color camera on the touch screen.
- the electronic device can automatically switch between the wide-angle color camera, the ultra-wide-angle color camera, and the telephoto color camera according to the distance between the object to be photographed in the current shooting scene and the electronic device, thereby utilizing the The camera performs image capture and shooting to obtain better shooting results.
- the technical solution provides an image capturing method, which is applied to an electronic device with a touch screen.
- the electronic device includes a wide-angle color camera, an ultra-wide-angle color camera, and a telephoto color camera.
- the method includes: the electronic device detects a first operation by the user for turning on the camera. In response to the first operation, the electronic device displays the shooting interface on the touch screen. The electronic device captures the image through the wide-angle color camera, and displays the image captured by the wide-angle color camera on the touch screen.
- the electronic device automatically switches to capturing the image through the ultra-wide-angle color camera. If the current camera for capturing images is a wide-angle color camera or an ultra-wide-angle color camera, and the distance between the object to be photographed and the electronic device is greater than or equal to the second preset value, the electronic device automatically switches to capturing the image through the telephoto color camera.
- the second preset value is greater than the first preset value.
- the electronic device automatically switches to capturing the image through the ultra-wide-angle color camera.
- the electronic device generates the first composition according to the first image captured by the camera currently used to capture the image. If the camera currently used to capture the image is a wide-angle color camera or a telephoto color camera, the electronic device also captures the second image through the ultra-wide-angle color camera.
- the electronic device generates a second composition based on the second image. If the first composition does not match the second composition, the electronic device prompts the user whether to switch the camera.
- the electronic device prompts the user to shoot according to the second image and the second composition.
- the electronic device detects the second operation of the user to instruct zooming.
- the electronic device determines the zoom magnification K. If M ⁇ K ⁇ 1, the electronic device switches to capturing images through the ultra-wide-angle color camera; the electronic device displays the images captured by the ultra-wide-angle color camera on the touch screen. If K ⁇ N, the electronic device switches to capturing the image through the telephoto color camera; the electronic device displays the image captured by the telephoto color camera on the touch screen. If 1 ⁇ K ⁇ N, the electronic device continues to capture images through the wide-angle color camera.
- M tan (B / 2) / tan (A / 2)
- N tan (B / 2) / tan (C / 2)
- A is the angle of view of the ultra-wide-angle color camera
- B is the wide-angle color camera
- C is the angle of view of the telephoto color camera
- A is greater than B
- B is greater than C.
- the electronic device displays the image captured by the ultra-wide-angle color camera or the telephoto color camera on the touch screen.
- the electronic device detects a third operation that the user uses to instruct recording.
- the electronic device displays the shooting interface in the recording mode in response to the third operation.
- the electronic device automatically zooms according to the size of the object to be photographed on the shooting interface, or according to the distance between the object to be photographed and the electronic device.
- the electronic device automatically switches the camera used to capture the image according to the zoom result.
- the electronic device can switch between the wide-angle color camera, the ultra-wide-angle color camera and the telephoto color camera according to the user's instruction or according to the current shooting scene, so as to use the camera that can adapt to the current shooting scene for image capturing and shooting, Get better shooting results.
- the present technical solution provides an apparatus for capturing an image, which is included in an electronic device, and the apparatus has a function of realizing the above aspect and the possible implementation manners of the above aspect.
- the function can be realized by hardware, and can also be realized by hardware executing corresponding software.
- the hardware or software includes one or more modules or units corresponding to the above functions. For example, a detection module or unit, a display module or unit, a processing module or unit, etc.
- the technical solution provides an electronic device, including: a touch screen, wherein the touch screen includes a touch-sensitive surface and a display; a wide-angle color camera, an ultra-wide-angle color camera, and a telephoto color camera; one or more processors; a memory ; Multiple applications; and one or more computer programs.
- one or more computer programs are stored in the memory, and the one or more computer programs include instructions.
- the electronic device is caused to execute the above aspect and various possible implementation manners of the above aspect.
- the technical solution provides an electronic device, including one or more processors and one or more memories.
- the one or more memories are coupled to one or more processors.
- the one or more memories are used to store computer program code.
- the computer program codes include computer instructions.
- the one or more processors execute the computer instructions, the electronic device is executed.
- An image capture method in any possible implementation of any of the above aspects.
- the present technical solution provides a computer storage medium, including computer instructions, which, when the computer instructions run on the electronic device, cause the electronic device to execute the image capturing method in any possible implementation of any of the above aspects.
- the technical solution provides a computer program product that, when the computer program product runs on an electronic device, causes the electronic device to perform any image capture method in any possible design of any of the above aspects.
- FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a hardware structure of an electronic device provided by this embodiment
- FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of a software structure of an electronic device provided by this embodiment.
- 4A-4E are schematic diagrams of a set of interfaces of the electronic device provided by this embodiment.
- 5A-5F are schematic diagrams of another set of interfaces of the electronic device provided by this embodiment.
- 6A-6B are schematic diagrams of another set of interfaces of the electronic device provided by this embodiment.
- FIGS. 7A-7B are schematic diagrams of another set of interfaces of the electronic device provided by this embodiment.
- FIG. 8 is a diagram of the correspondence between the image collected by the camera provided by this embodiment and the cropped part
- FIGS. 9A-9B are schematic diagrams of another set of interfaces of the electronic device provided by this embodiment.
- FIGS. 10A-10B are schematic diagrams of another set of interfaces of the electronic device provided by this embodiment.
- FIGS. 11A-11B are schematic diagrams of another set of interfaces of the electronic device provided by this embodiment.
- FIGS. 13A-13D are schematic diagrams of another set of interfaces of the electronic device provided by this embodiment.
- FIG. 16 is another schematic structural diagram of an electronic device provided by this embodiment.
- first and second are used for description purposes only, and cannot be understood as indicating or implying relative importance or implicitly indicating the number of indicated technical features.
- the features defined as “first” and “second” may explicitly or implicitly include one or more of the features.
- the meaning of “plurality” is two or more.
- the image capturing method provided in this embodiment can be applied to mobile phones, tablet computers, cameras, wearable devices, in-vehicle devices, augmented reality (augmented reality (AR) / virtual reality (VR) devices, notebook computers, and ultra-mobile individuals
- augmented reality augmented reality (AR) / virtual reality (VR) devices
- notebook computers notebook computers
- ultra-mobile individuals on electronic devices such as ultra-mobile personal computers (UMPCs), netbooks, personal digital assistants (PDAs), etc.
- this embodiment does not limit the specific types of electronic devices.
- FIG. 1 shows a schematic structural diagram of an electronic device 100.
- the electronic device 100 may include a processor 110, an external memory interface 120, an internal memory 121, a universal serial bus (USB) interface 130, a charging management module 130, a power management module 141, a battery 142, an antenna 1, an antenna 2 , Mobile communication module 150, wireless communication module 160, audio module 170, speaker 170A, receiver 170B, microphone 170C, headphone jack 170D, sensor module 180, key 190, motor 191, indicator 192, camera 193, display 194, and Subscriber identification module (SIM) card interface 195, etc.
- SIM Subscriber identification module
- the sensor module 180 may include a pressure sensor 180A, a gyro sensor 180B, an air pressure sensor 180C, a magnetic sensor 180D, an acceleration sensor 180E, a distance sensor 180F, a proximity light sensor 180G, a fingerprint sensor 180H, a temperature sensor 180J, a touch sensor 180K, and ambient light Sensor 180L, bone conduction sensor 180M, etc.
- the structure illustrated in this embodiment does not constitute a specific limitation on the electronic device 100.
- the electronic device 100 may include more or fewer components than illustrated, or combine certain components, or split certain components, or arrange different components.
- the illustrated components can be implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of software and hardware.
- the processor 110 may include one or more processing units.
- the processor 110 may include an application processor (application processor, AP), a modem processor, a graphics processor (graphics processing unit, GPU), and an image signal processor. (image) signal processor (ISP), controller, memory, video codec, digital signal processor (DSP), baseband processor, and / or neural-network processing unit (NPU) Wait.
- the processor 110 may be one or more processors; different processing units may be independent devices, or may be integrated in one or more processors.
- the controller may be the nerve center and command center of the electronic device 100.
- the controller can generate the operation control signal according to the instruction operation code and the timing signal to complete the control of fetching instructions and executing instructions.
- the processor 110 may also be provided with a memory for storing instructions and data.
- the memory in the processor 110 is a cache memory.
- the memory may store instructions or data that the processor 110 has just used or recycled. If the processor 110 needs to use the instruction or data again, it can be directly called from the memory. The repeated access is avoided, and the waiting time of the processor 110 is reduced, thereby improving the efficiency of the system.
- the processor 110 may include one or more interfaces.
- Interfaces can include integrated circuit (inter-integrated circuit, I2C) interface, integrated circuit built-in audio (inter-integrated circuit, sound, I2S) interface, pulse code modulation (pulse code modulation (PCM) interface, universal asynchronous transceiver (universal asynchronous) receiver / transmitter, UART) interface, mobile industry processor interface (MIPI), general-purpose input / output (GPIO) interface, subscriber identity module (SIM) interface, and / Or universal serial bus (USB) interface, etc.
- I2C integrated circuit
- I2S integrated circuit built-in audio
- PCM pulse code modulation
- PCM pulse code modulation
- UART universal asynchronous transceiver
- MIPI mobile industry processor interface
- GPIO general-purpose input / output
- SIM subscriber identity module
- USB universal serial bus
- the I2C interface is a bidirectional synchronous serial bus, including a serial data line (serial data line, SDA) and a serial clock line (derail clock line, SCL).
- the processor 110 may include multiple sets of I2C buses.
- the processor 110 may be coupled to the touch sensor 180K, the charger, the flash, the camera 193, etc. through different I2C bus interfaces.
- the processor 110 may couple the touch sensor 180K through the I2C interface, so that the processor 110 and the touch sensor 180K communicate through the I2C bus interface to realize the touch function of the electronic device 100.
- the I2S interface can be used for audio communication.
- the processor 110 may include multiple sets of I2S buses.
- the processor 110 may be coupled to the audio module 170 through an I2S bus to implement communication between the processor 110 and the audio module 170.
- the audio module 170 can transmit audio signals to the wireless communication module 160 through the I2S interface, to realize the function of answering the phone call through the Bluetooth headset.
- the PCM interface can also be used for audio communication, sampling, quantizing and encoding analog signals.
- the audio module 170 and the wireless communication module 160 may be coupled through a PCM bus interface.
- the audio module 170 can also transmit audio signals to the wireless communication module 160 through the PCM interface to realize the function of answering the call through the Bluetooth headset. Both I2S interface and PCM interface can be used for audio communication.
- the UART interface is a universal serial data bus used for asynchronous communication.
- the bus may be a bidirectional communication bus. It converts the data to be transmitted between serial communication and parallel communication.
- the UART interface is generally used to connect the processor 110 and the wireless communication module 160.
- the processor 110 communicates with the Bluetooth module in the wireless communication module 160 through the UART interface to implement the Bluetooth function.
- the audio module 170 may transmit audio signals to the wireless communication module 160 through the UART interface, so as to realize the function of playing music through the Bluetooth headset.
- the MIPI interface can be used to connect the processor 110 to peripheral devices such as the display screen 194 and the camera 193.
- MIPI interface includes camera serial interface (camera serial interface, CSI), display serial interface (display serial interface, DSI) and so on.
- the processor 110 and the camera 193 communicate through a CSI interface to implement the shooting function of the electronic device 100.
- the processor 110 and the display screen 194 communicate through the DSI interface to realize the display function of the electronic device 100.
- the GPIO interface can be configured via software.
- the GPIO interface can be configured as a control signal or a data signal.
- the GPIO interface may be used to connect the processor 110 to the camera 193, the display screen 194, the wireless communication module 160, the audio module 170, the sensor module 180, and the like.
- GPIO interface can also be configured as I2C interface, I2S interface, UART interface, MIPI interface, etc.
- the USB interface 130 is an interface that conforms to the USB standard, and may specifically be a Mini USB interface, a Micro USB interface, a USB Type C interface, etc.
- the USB interface 130 can be used to connect a charger to charge the electronic device 100, and can also be used to transfer data between the electronic device 100 and peripheral devices. It can also be used to connect headphones and play audio through the headphones.
- the interface can also be used to connect other electronic devices, such as AR devices.
- the interface connection relationship between the modules illustrated in this embodiment is only a schematic description, and does not constitute a limitation on the structure of the electronic device 100.
- the electronic device 100 may also use different interface connection methods in the foregoing embodiments, or a combination of multiple interface connection methods.
- the charging management module 130 is used to receive charging input from the charger.
- the charger can be a wireless charger or a wired charger.
- the charging management module 130 may receive the charging input of the wired charger through the USB interface 130.
- the charging management module 130 may receive wireless charging input through the wireless charging coil of the electronic device 100. While the charging management module 130 charges the battery 142, it can also supply power to the electronic device through the power management module 141.
- the power management module 141 is used to connect the battery 142, the charging management module 130 and the processor 110.
- the power management module 141 receives input from the battery 142 and / or the charging management module 130, and supplies power to the processor 110, the internal memory 121, the external memory, the display screen 194, the camera 193, and the wireless communication module 160.
- the power management module 141 can also be used to monitor battery capacity, battery cycle times, battery health status (leakage, impedance) and other parameters.
- the power management module 141 may also be disposed in the processor 110.
- the power management module 141 and the charging management module 130 may also be set in the same device.
- the wireless communication function of the electronic device 100 can be realized by the antenna 1, the antenna 2, the mobile communication module 150, the wireless communication module 160, the modem processor, and the baseband processor.
- Antenna 1 and antenna 2 are used to transmit and receive electromagnetic wave signals.
- Each antenna in the electronic device 100 may be used to cover a single or multiple communication frequency bands. Different antennas can also be reused to improve antenna utilization.
- the antenna 1 can be multiplexed as a diversity antenna of a wireless local area network. In other embodiments, the antenna may be used in conjunction with a tuning switch.
- the mobile communication module 150 can provide a wireless communication solution including 2G / 3G / 4G / 5G and the like applied to the electronic device 100.
- the mobile communication module 150 may include at least one filter, switch, power amplifier, low noise amplifier (LNA), and the like.
- the mobile communication module 150 can receive the electromagnetic wave from the antenna 1, filter and amplify the received electromagnetic wave, and transmit it to the modem processor for demodulation.
- the mobile communication module 150 can also amplify the signal modulated by the modulation and demodulation processor and convert it to electromagnetic wave radiation through the antenna 1.
- at least part of the functional modules of the mobile communication module 150 may be provided in the processor 110.
- at least part of the functional modules of the mobile communication module 150 and at least part of the modules of the processor 110 may be provided in the same device.
- the modem processor may include a modulator and a demodulator.
- the modulator is used to modulate the low-frequency baseband signal to be transmitted into a high-frequency signal.
- the demodulator is used to demodulate the received electromagnetic wave signal into a low-frequency baseband signal.
- the demodulator then transmits the demodulated low-frequency baseband signal to the baseband processor for processing.
- the low-frequency baseband signal is processed by the baseband processor and then passed to the application processor.
- the application processor outputs a sound signal through an audio device (not limited to a speaker 170A, a receiver 170B, etc.), or displays an image or video through a display screen 194.
- the modem processor may be an independent device.
- the modem processor may be independent of the processor 110, and may be set in the same device as the mobile communication module 150 or other functional modules.
- the wireless communication module 160 can provide wireless local area networks (wireless local area networks, WLAN) (such as wireless fidelity (Wi-Fi) networks), Bluetooth (Bluetooth, BT), and global navigation satellites that are applied to the electronic device 100 Wireless communication solutions such as global navigation (satellite system, GNSS), frequency modulation (FM), near field communication (NFC), infrared (IR), etc.
- the wireless communication module 160 may be one or more devices integrating at least one communication processing module.
- the wireless communication module 160 receives the electromagnetic wave via the antenna 2, frequency-modulates and filters the electromagnetic wave signal, and sends the processed signal to the processor 110.
- the wireless communication module 160 may also receive the signal to be transmitted from the processor 110, frequency-modulate it, amplify it, and convert it to electromagnetic waves through the antenna 2 to radiate it out.
- Wireless communication technology may include global mobile communication system (global system for mobile communications, GSM), general packet radio service (general packet radio service, GPRS), code division multiple access (code division multiple access, CDMA), broadband code division Multiple access (wideband code division multiple access, WCDMA), time division code division multiple access (time-division code division multiple access, TD-SCDMA), long term evolution (LTE), BT, GNSS, WLAN, NFC, FM , And / or IR technology, etc.
- GSM global system for mobile communications
- general packet radio service general packet radio service
- GPRS general packet radio service
- code division multiple access code division multiple access
- CDMA broadband code division Multiple access
- WCDMA wideband code division multiple access
- TD-SCDMA time division code division multiple access
- LTE long term evolution
- GNSS can include global positioning system (GPS), global navigation satellite system (global navigation system (GLONASS), Beidou satellite navigation system (beidou navigation, satellite system, BDS), quasi-zenith satellite system (quasi-zenith satellite system (QZSS) and / or satellite-based augmentation systems (SBAS).
- GPS global positioning system
- GLONASS global navigation satellite system
- Beidou satellite navigation system beidou navigation, satellite system, BDS
- quasi-zenith satellite system quasi-zenith satellite system
- QZSS quasi-zenith satellite system
- SBAS satellite-based augmentation systems
- the electronic device 100 realizes a display function through a GPU, a display screen 194, and an application processor.
- the GPU is a microprocessor for image processing, connecting the display screen 194 and the application processor.
- the GPU is used to perform mathematical and geometric calculations, and is used for graphics rendering.
- the processor 110 may include one or more GPUs that execute program instructions to generate or change display information.
- the display screen 194 is used to display images, videos and the like.
- the display screen 194 includes a display panel.
- the display panel may use a liquid crystal display (LCD), an organic light-emitting diode (OLED), an active matrix organic light-emitting diode or an active matrix organic light-emitting diode (active-matrix organic light) emitting diode, AMOLED), flexible light-emitting diode (FLED), Miniled, MicroLed, Micro-oLed, quantum dot light emitting diode (QLED), etc.
- the electronic device 100 may include 1 or N display screens 194, where N is a positive integer greater than 1.
- the electronic device 100 can realize a shooting function through an ISP, a camera 193, a video codec, a GPU, a display screen 194, an application processor, and the like.
- the ISP processes the data fed back by the camera 193. For example, when taking a picture, the shutter is opened, the light is transmitted to the camera photosensitive element through the lens, the optical signal is converted into an electrical signal, and the camera photosensitive element transmits the electrical signal to the ISP for processing, which is converted into a visible image.
- ISP can also optimize the algorithm of image noise, brightness and skin color. ISP can also optimize the exposure, color temperature and other parameters of the shooting scene. In some embodiments, the ISP may be set in the camera 193.
- the camera 193 is used to capture still images or videos.
- the object generates an optical image through the lens and projects it onto the photosensitive element.
- the photosensitive element may be a charge coupled device (charge coupled device, CCD) or a complementary metal-oxide-semiconductor (CMOS) phototransistor.
- CCD charge coupled device
- CMOS complementary metal-oxide-semiconductor
- the photosensitive element converts the optical signal into an electrical signal, and then transmits the electrical signal to the ISP to convert it into a digital image signal.
- the ISP outputs the digital image signal to the DSP for processing.
- DSP converts digital image signals into standard RGB, YUV and other image signals.
- the electronic device 100 may include 1 or N cameras 193, where N is a positive integer greater than 1.
- N is greater than or equal to 3
- the camera 193 may specifically include an ultra-wide-angle camera, a wide-angle camera, and a telephoto camera.
- the wide-angle camera may be a color camera
- the ultra-wide-angle camera may be a color camera or a black-and-white camera
- the telephoto camera may be a color camera or a black-and-white camera.
- the camera 193 includes an ultra-wide-angle color camera, a wide-angle color camera, and a telephoto color camera.
- each camera may be concentratedly arranged at a certain position on the electronic device 100, or may be distributed at different positions on the electronic device 100.
- FIG. 2 shows some possible arrangements between the three cameras.
- the position of each camera is not limited to the several arrangements listed in FIG. 2 and can be determined according to the actual situation.
- multiple cameras may be located on the same horizontal plane, that is, there is no height difference between the multiple cameras. In this way, the electronic device 100 can be prevented from being too thick, which helps to improve the user experience.
- the digital signal processor is used to process digital signals. In addition to digital image signals, it can also process other digital signals. For example, when the electronic device 100 is selected at a frequency point, the digital signal processor is used to perform Fourier transform on the energy at the frequency point.
- Video codec is used to compress or decompress digital video.
- the electronic device 100 may support one or more video codecs. In this way, the electronic device 100 can play or record videos in various encoding formats, for example: moving picture experts group (MPEG) 1, MPEG2, MPEG3, MPEG4, etc.
- MPEG moving picture experts group
- NPU is a neural-network (NN) computing processor.
- NN neural-network
- the NPU can realize applications such as intelligent recognition of the electronic device 100, such as image recognition, face recognition, voice recognition, and text understanding.
- the external memory interface 120 can be used to connect an external memory card, such as a Micro SD card, to expand the storage capacity of the electronic device 100.
- the external memory card communicates with the processor 110 through the external memory interface 120 to realize the data storage function. For example, save music, video and other files in an external memory card.
- the internal memory 121 may be used to store one or more computer programs, which may include instructions.
- the processor 110 causes the electronic device 100 to execute various functional applications and data processing by executing instructions stored in the internal memory 121.
- the internal memory 121 may include a storage program area and a storage data area.
- the storage program area may store an operating system, and may also store one or more application programs (such as a camera, Facebook, etc.).
- the storage data area may store data (such as photos, contacts, etc.) created during use of the electronic device 100 and the like.
- the internal memory 121 may include a high-speed random access memory, and may also include a non-volatile memory, such as at least one disk storage device, a flash memory device, a universal flash memory (universal flash storage, UFS), and so on.
- a non-volatile memory such as at least one disk storage device, a flash memory device, a universal flash memory (universal flash storage, UFS), and so on.
- the electronic device 100 may implement audio functions through an audio module 170, a speaker 170A, a receiver 170B, a microphone 170C, a headphone interface 170D, and an application processor. For example, music playback, recording, etc.
- the audio module 170 is used to convert digital audio information into analog audio signal output, and also used to convert analog audio input into digital audio signal.
- the audio module 170 can also be used to encode and decode audio signals.
- the audio module 170 may be disposed in the processor 110, or some functional modules of the audio module 170 may be disposed in the processor 110.
- the speaker 170A also called “speaker” is used to convert audio electrical signals into sound signals.
- the electronic device 100 can listen to music through the speaker 170A, or listen to a hands-free call.
- the receiver 170B also known as "handset" is used to convert audio electrical signals into sound signals.
- the voice can be received by bringing the receiver 170B close to the ear.
- Microphone 170C also known as “microphone”, “microphone”, is used to convert sound signals into electrical signals.
- the user can make a sound by approaching the microphone 170C through a person's mouth, and input a sound signal to the microphone 170C.
- the electronic device 100 may be provided with at least one microphone 170C. In other embodiments, the electronic device 100 may be provided with two microphones 170C. In addition to collecting sound signals, it may also implement a noise reduction function. In other embodiments, the electronic device 100 may also be provided with three, four, or more microphones 170C to collect sound signals, reduce noise, identify sound sources, and implement directional recording functions.
- the headset interface 170D is used to connect wired headsets.
- the earphone interface 170D may be a USB interface 130, or a 3.5mm open mobile electronic device (open mobile terminal) platform (OMTP) standard interface, the American Telecommunications Industry Association (cellular telecommunications industry association of the United States, CTIA) standard interface.
- OMTP open mobile electronic device
- CTIA cellular telecommunications industry association of the United States
- the pressure sensor 180A is used to sense the pressure signal and can convert the pressure signal into an electrical signal.
- the pressure sensor 180A may be provided on the display screen 194.
- the capacitive pressure sensor may be a parallel plate including at least two conductive materials. When force is applied to the pressure sensor 180A, the capacitance between the electrodes changes.
- the electronic device 100 determines the intensity of the pressure according to the change in capacitance.
- the electronic device 100 detects the intensity of the touch operation according to the pressure sensor 180A.
- the electronic device 100 may also calculate the touched position based on the detection signal of the pressure sensor 180A.
- touch operations that act on the same touch position but have different touch operation intensities may correspond to different operation instructions. For example, when a touch operation with a touch operation intensity less than the first pressure threshold acts on the short message application icon, an instruction to view the short message is executed. When a touch operation with a touch operation intensity greater than or equal to the first pressure threshold acts on the short message application icon, an instruction to create a new short message is executed.
- the gyro sensor 180B may be used to determine the movement posture of the electronic device 100.
- the angular velocity of the electronic device 100 around three axes ie, x, y, and z axes
- the gyro sensor 180B can be used for shooting anti-shake.
- the gyro sensor 180B detects the shaking angle of the electronic device 100, calculates the distance that the lens module needs to compensate based on the angle, and allows the lens to counteract the shaking of the electronic device 100 through reverse movement to achieve anti-shake.
- the gyro sensor 180B can also be used for navigation and somatosensory game scenes.
- the air pressure sensor 180C is used to measure air pressure.
- the electronic device 100 calculates the altitude by using the air pressure value measured by the air pressure sensor 180C to assist positioning and navigation.
- the magnetic sensor 180D includes a Hall sensor.
- the electronic device 100 can detect the opening and closing of the flip holster using the magnetic sensor 180D.
- the electronic device 100 may detect the opening and closing of the clamshell according to the magnetic sensor 180D.
- characteristics such as automatic unlocking of the flip cover are set.
- the acceleration sensor 180E can detect the magnitude of acceleration of the electronic device 100 in various directions (generally three axes). When the electronic device 100 is stationary, the magnitude and direction of gravity can be detected. It can also be used to recognize the posture of electronic devices, and be used in applications such as horizontal and vertical screen switching and pedometers.
- the distance sensor 180F is used to measure the distance.
- the electronic device 100 can measure the distance by infrared or laser. In some embodiments, when shooting scenes, the electronic device 100 may use the distance sensor 180F to measure distance to achieve fast focusing.
- the proximity light sensor 180G may include, for example, a light emitting diode (LED) and a light detector, such as a photodiode.
- the light emitting diode may be an infrared light emitting diode.
- the electronic device 100 emits infrared light outward through the light emitting diode.
- the electronic device 100 uses a photodiode to detect infrared reflected light from nearby objects. When sufficient reflected light is detected, it may be determined that there is an object near the electronic device 100. When insufficient reflected light is detected, the electronic device 100 may determine that there is no object near the electronic device 100.
- the electronic device 100 can use the proximity light sensor 180G to detect that the user holds the electronic device 100 close to the ear to talk, so as to automatically turn off the screen to save power.
- the proximity light sensor 180G can also be used in leather case mode, pocket mode automatically unlocks and locks the screen.
- the ambient light sensor 180L is used to sense the brightness of ambient light.
- the electronic device 100 can adaptively adjust the brightness of the display screen 194 according to the perceived brightness of the ambient light.
- the ambient light sensor 180L can also be used to automatically adjust the white balance when taking pictures.
- the ambient light sensor 180L can also cooperate with the proximity light sensor 180G to detect whether the electronic device 100 is in a pocket to prevent accidental touch.
- the fingerprint sensor 180H is used to collect fingerprints.
- the electronic device 100 can use the collected fingerprint characteristics to realize fingerprint unlocking, access to application locks, fingerprint taking pictures, fingerprint answering calls, and the like.
- the temperature sensor 180J is used to detect the temperature.
- the electronic device 100 uses the temperature detected by the temperature sensor 180J to execute a temperature processing strategy. For example, when the temperature reported by the temperature sensor 180J exceeds a threshold, the electronic device 100 performs performance reduction of the processor located near the temperature sensor 180J in order to reduce power consumption and implement thermal protection. In other embodiments, when the temperature is lower than another threshold, the electronic device 100 heats the battery 142 to avoid abnormal shutdown of the electronic device 100 due to low temperature. In some other embodiments, when the temperature is below another threshold, the electronic device 100 performs boosting on the output voltage of the battery 142 to avoid abnormal shutdown due to low temperature.
- the touch sensor 180K may also be called a touch panel or a touch-sensitive surface.
- the touch sensor 180K may be provided on the display screen 194, and the touch sensor 180K and the display screen 194 constitute a touch screen, also called a "touch screen”.
- the touch sensor 180K is used to detect a touch operation acting on or near it.
- the touch sensor can pass the detected touch operation to the application processor to determine the type of touch event.
- the visual output related to the touch operation can be provided through the display screen 194.
- the touch sensor 180K may also be disposed on the surface of the electronic device 100, which is different from the location where the display screen 194 is located.
- the bone conduction sensor 180M can acquire vibration signals.
- the bone conduction sensor 180M can acquire the vibration signal of the vibrating bone mass of the human body part.
- the bone conduction sensor 180M can also contact the pulse of the human body and receive a blood pressure beating signal.
- the bone conduction sensor 180M may also be provided in the earphone and combined into a bone conduction earphone.
- the audio module 170 may parse out the voice signal based on the vibration signal of the vibrating bone block of the voice part acquired by the bone conduction sensor 180M to realize the voice function.
- the application processor can analyze the heart rate information based on the blood pressure beating signal acquired by the bone conduction sensor 180M, and realize the heart rate detection function.
- the key 190 includes a power-on key, a volume key, and the like.
- the key 190 may be a mechanical key. It can also be a touch button.
- the electronic device 100 can receive key input and generate key signal input related to user settings and function control of the electronic device 100.
- the motor 191 may generate a vibration prompt.
- the motor 191 can be used for vibration notification of incoming calls and can also be used for touch vibration feedback.
- touch operations applied to different applications may correspond to different vibration feedback effects.
- the motor 191 can also correspond to different vibration feedback effects.
- Different application scenarios for example: time reminder, receiving information, alarm clock, game, etc.
- Touch vibration feedback effect can also support customization.
- the indicator 192 may be an indicator light, which may be used to indicate a charging state, a power change, and may also be used to indicate a message, a missed call, a notification, and the like.
- the SIM card interface 195 is used to connect a SIM card.
- the SIM card can be inserted into or removed from the SIM card interface 195 to achieve contact and separation with the electronic device 100.
- the electronic device 100 may support 1 or N SIM card interfaces, where N is a positive integer greater than 1.
- the SIM card interface 195 can support Nano SIM cards, Micro SIM cards, SIM cards, etc.
- the same SIM card interface 195 can insert multiple cards at the same time. The types of multiple cards can be the same or different.
- the SIM card interface 195 can also be compatible with different types of SIM cards.
- the SIM card interface 195 can also be compatible with external memory cards.
- the electronic device 100 interacts with the network through a SIM card to realize functions such as call and data communication.
- the electronic device 100 uses eSIM, that is, an embedded SIM card.
- the eSIM card can be embedded in the electronic device 100 and cannot be separated from the electronic device 100.
- the software system of the electronic device 100 may adopt a layered architecture, event-driven architecture, micro-core architecture, micro-service architecture, or cloud architecture.
- This embodiment takes a layered architecture Android system as an example to exemplarily explain the software structure of the electronic device 100.
- FIG. 3 is a block diagram of the software structure of the electronic device 100 of this embodiment.
- the layered architecture divides the software into several layers, and each layer has a clear role and division of labor.
- the layers communicate with each other through a software interface.
- the Android system is divided into four layers, from top to bottom are the application layer, the application framework layer, the Android runtime and the system library, and the kernel layer.
- the application layer may include a series of application packages.
- the application package may include applications such as camera, gallery, calendar, call, map, navigation, WLAN, Bluetooth, music, video, and short message.
- the application framework layer provides an application programming interface (application programming interface) and programming framework for applications at the application layer.
- the application framework layer includes some predefined functions.
- the application framework layer may include a window manager, a content provider, a view system, a phone manager, a resource manager, a notification manager, and so on.
- the window manager is used to manage window programs.
- the window manager can obtain the size of the display screen, determine whether there is a status bar, lock the screen, intercept the screen, etc.
- Content providers are used to store and retrieve data and make it accessible to applications.
- Data can include videos, images, audio, calls made and received, browsing history and bookmarks, phone book, etc.
- the view system includes visual controls, such as controls for displaying text and controls for displaying pictures.
- the view system can be used to build applications.
- the display interface can be composed of one or more views.
- a display interface including an SMS notification icon may include a view that displays text and a view that displays pictures.
- the phone manager is used to provide the communication function of the electronic device 100. For example, the management of the call state (including connection, hang up, etc.).
- the resource manager provides various resources for the application, such as localized strings, icons, pictures, layout files, video files, and so on.
- the notification manager enables applications to display notification information in the status bar, which can be used to convey notification-type messages, and can disappear after a short stay without user interaction.
- the notification manager is used to notify the completion of downloading, message reminders, etc.
- the notification manager can also be a notification that appears in the status bar at the top of the system in the form of a chart or scroll bar text, such as a notification of an application running in the background, or a notification that appears on the screen in the form of a dialog window.
- the text message is displayed in the status bar, a prompt sound is emitted, the electronic device vibrates, and the indicator light flashes.
- Android Runtime includes core library and virtual machine. Android runtime is responsible for the scheduling and management of the Android system.
- the core library contains two parts: one part is the function function that Java language needs to call, and the other part is the core library of Android.
- the application layer and the application framework layer run in the virtual machine.
- the virtual machine executes the java files of the application layer and the application framework layer into binary files.
- the virtual machine is used to perform functions such as object lifecycle management, stack management, thread management, security and exception management, and garbage collection.
- the system library may include multiple functional modules. For example: surface manager (surface manager), media library (Media library), 3D graphics processing library (for example: OpenGL ES), 2D graphics engine (for example: SGL), etc.
- surface manager surface manager
- media library Media library
- 3D graphics processing library for example: OpenGL ES
- 2D graphics engine for example: SGL
- the surface manager is used to manage the display subsystem and provides the fusion of 2D and 3D layers for multiple applications.
- the media library supports a variety of commonly used audio, video format playback and recording, and still image files.
- the media library can support multiple audio and video encoding formats, such as: MPEG4, H.264, MP3, AAC, AMR, JPG, PNG, etc.
- the 3D graphics processing library is used to realize 3D graphics drawing, image rendering, synthesis, and layer processing.
- the 2D graphics engine is a drawing engine for 2D drawing.
- the kernel layer is the layer between hardware and software.
- the kernel layer contains at least the display driver, camera driver, audio driver, and sensor driver.
- the corresponding hardware interrupt is sent to the kernel layer.
- the kernel layer processes touch operations into original input events (including touch coordinates, time stamps and other information of touch operations).
- the original input events are stored in the kernel layer.
- the application framework layer obtains the original input event from the kernel layer and identifies the control corresponding to the input event. Taking the touch operation as a touch click operation, and the control corresponding to the click operation is a control of the camera application icon as an example, the camera application calls an interface of the application framework layer, starts the camera application, and determines one or more cameras 193 to be used Then, the driver of the one or more cameras 193 to be used is started by calling the kernel layer, and the still image or video is captured by the one or more cameras 193.
- the electronic device 100 can focus through the camera and preview the image based on the information captured by the camera. After receiving the user's instruction to "shoot", the electronic device 100 can generate the captured image according to the information captured by the camera.
- the electronic device 100 can select a camera suitable for the current shooting scene from the three cameras to shoot, in order to obtain better in the current shooting scene Shooting effect.
- the images obtained by the two cameras of the electronic device are simply fused to obtain the captured images.
- the method provided in this embodiment can be used in various and variable shooting In the scene, the image obtained by the camera suitable for the current shooting scene is used to generate the image obtained by shooting, so that a high-quality shot image can be obtained in each shooting scene.
- the electronic device 100 can switch between different cameras, and different cameras can be applied to different shooting scenes, so the electronic device 100 is suitable for more shooting scenes, and the functions of the electronic device More powerful and diverse.
- the mobile phone having the structure shown in FIG. 1 and FIG. 3 will be used as the electronic device 100.
- the electronic device 100 including an ultra-wide-angle color camera, a wide-angle color camera, and a telephoto color camera as examples, the technical solution provided in this embodiment will be specifically described. .
- the wide-angle color camera is referred to as a first camera
- the ultra-wide-angle color camera is referred to as a second camera
- the telephoto color camera is referred to as a third camera.
- the pixels and resolutions of different cameras can be the same or different.
- the first camera may have the highest pixel and resolution.
- the second camera has the largest angle of view and the largest field of view possible.
- the field of view of the first camera is smaller than the field of view of the second camera and larger than the field of view of the third camera, that is, the field of view of the first camera is smaller than the second camera but larger than the third camera, which can be used to shoot larger Scenery within the field of view; and, compared with the other two cameras, the first camera has the best imaging quality (or picture quality).
- the field of view of the third camera is smaller than that of the second camera and the first camera, but the focal length of the third camera is larger than that of the second camera and the first camera, and is suitable for capturing distant information and shooting distant objects.
- the field of view angle is used to indicate the maximum angle range that the camera can shoot during the process of capturing an image on the mobile phone, and the scene within the angle range can be captured by the camera. If the object to be photographed is within this angle range, the object to be photographed will be collected by the mobile phone. If the object to be photographed is outside this angle range, the photographed device will not be collected by the mobile phone.
- the larger the field of view of the mobile phone the larger the shooting range and the shorter the focal length. The smaller the field of view of the mobile phone, the smaller the shooting range and the longer the focal length.
- angle of view can also be replaced with words such as “field of view range”, “field of view range”, “field of view area”, “imaging range” or “imaging field of view”.
- this article does not limit the name of the "angle of view”, as long as the above concept is expressed.
- “angle of view” is just a word used in this embodiment, the meaning of its representative has been recorded in this embodiment, and its name does not constitute any limitation to this embodiment; in addition, in some other implementations
- “angle of view” may also be referred to as other names such as “field of view range”, “field of view range”, “field of view area”, “imaging range” or “imaging field of view”.
- the first camera has the strongest resolution.
- Resolution can be understood as the ability to distinguish the details of the original object. For example, if the object being photographed is a piece of paper covered with many lines, an image captured by a mobile phone with strong resolution can recognize 100 lines, while an image captured by a mobile phone with weak resolution can only recognize 10 lines. line.
- the greater the resolution of the mobile phone the stronger the ability of the mobile phone to restore the details of the object to be captured after capturing the image of the object to be captured. For example, if the user wants to enlarge the captured image, the sharpness of the enlarged image is higher.
- the resolution has a certain relationship with pixels, resolution, etc., the higher the resolution of the pixel or the higher the resolution of the mobile phone. Imaging quality or picture quality may include such aspects as sharpness, sharpness, resolution, color gamut range, color purity, color balance, and so on.
- the imaging quality of the first camera is higher than that of the other two cameras, and the field of view angle of the first camera is centered, a larger field of view can be captured, and the resolution of the first camera is strong.
- the comprehensive ability of the camera is strong, so the first camera can be used as the main camera, and the other two cameras can be used as auxiliary cameras.
- the position of the first camera in the mobile phone may be between the second camera and the third camera. In this way, the first camera as the main camera can capture the information of the object to be photographed in the main field of view.
- the mobile phone can use different cameras in these cameras to shoot in different shooting scenarios. That is, the mobile phone can select a camera suitable for the current shooting scene from the second camera, the first camera, and the third camera to shoot, so that a better shooting effect can be obtained in the current shooting scene.
- the mobile phone can be photographed using / through different cameras in different shooting scenarios.
- the camera application can be started to display a graphical user interface (GUI) as shown in FIG. 4A, which can be called a shooting interface.
- GUI graphical user interface
- a viewfinder frame 400 and controls for indicating the camera are displayed on the shooting interface.
- a preview image collected by the camera (the preview image is not shown in the drawing) can be displayed in the framing frame 400.
- the control for indicating the camera may include a control 401 for indicating the second camera, a control 402 for indicating the first camera, and a control 403 for indicating the third camera.
- the user may determine the camera to be used according to the current shooting scene, click on the control corresponding to the camera to be used on the shooting interface, and then aim the camera at the object to be shot to shoot. After the mobile phone detects that the user clicks the control of the camera on the shooting interface, the camera is selected by the user to shoot. In other embodiments, the camera of the mobile phone is aimed at the object to be photographed, and a preview image of the object to be photographed is displayed in the framing frame 400 of the mobile phone. The user determines the camera to be used according to the current shooting scene, the size of the preview image displayed in the finder frame 400, and the field of view of the preview image, and clicks on the control corresponding to the camera to be used on the shooting interface.
- the camera is selected by the user to shoot.
- the user can manually select the camera to be used according to the current shooting scene, and the mobile phone shoots according to the camera selected by the user.
- the mobile phone uses the first camera to shoot by default, and the volume of the object to be photographed is large.
- the object to be photographed is a tall building, a group of people, or a long bridge.
- the imaging range of the camera is also large when shooting.
- the mobile phone uses the second camera to shoot.
- the imaging range of the second camera is the largest, the user can actively designate to use the second camera suitable for the current shooting scene to shoot, so as to use the second camera to complete the shooting of the large-volume object to be photographed as much as possible.
- the above description is based on the example that the first camera is used for shooting by default after the mobile phone is turned on, and the second camera or the third camera can also be used for shooting after the mobile phone is turned on. Alternatively, after the camera is turned on by the mobile phone, the camera used to capture the image when the camera was last exited may be used for shooting.
- the embodiments of the present application are not limited.
- a control 404 for indicating the second camera, a control 405 for indicating the first camera, and a control 406 for indicating the third camera are displayed on the shooting interface.
- the object to be photographed is closer to the mobile phone and the volume of the object to be photographed is smaller.
- the object to be photographed is a person near the mobile phone.
- the user can click the control 405 according to the current shooting scene to select the first camera for shooting.
- the user since the imaging range of the first camera is centered and the imaging quality is the best, the user can actively designate the first camera suitable for the current shooting scene to shoot, so as to obtain a better shooting effect.
- a control 407 for indicating the second camera, a control 408 for indicating the first camera, and a control 409 for indicating the third camera are displayed on the shooting interface.
- the object to be photographed is far away from the mobile phone.
- the object to be photographed is a car in the distance.
- the user can click the control 409 according to the current shooting scene to select the third camera for shooting.
- the third camera since the third camera has the largest focal length and is suitable for capturing distant information, the user can actively designate the third camera suitable for the current shooting scene to shoot distant objects, so as to obtain a better shooting effect.
- the user can also click on the control 409 and the control 408 according to the current shooting scene to select the two cameras of the third camera and the first camera to shoot .
- the mobile phone can fuse the images collected by the third camera suitable for shooting distant scenes and the first camera with the best imaging quality, thereby obtaining a better shooting effect.
- a control 410 for indicating shooting options is displayed on the shooting interface.
- the mobile phone may display a GUI as shown in FIG. 4E.
- the mobile phone uses the at least one camera selected by the user To shoot.
- the user can select at least one camera suitable for the shooting scene to shoot according to the current specific shooting scene, so as to improve the shooting effect in the current shooting scene.
- the images obtained by the two cameras of the mobile phone are simply merged to obtain the final captured image.
- the method provided in this embodiment can be used in a variety of and variable shooting In the scene, the image obtained by the camera or the combination of cameras suitable for the current shooting scene is switched in real time to obtain the image obtained by the final shooting, so that the shot image with better effect can be obtained in each shooting scene.
- controls for indicating the second camera, the first camera, and the third camera may be different icons, or may be the same icon.
- the above controls 401, 402, 403 may be different icons or the same icon.
- the shooting interface may also include a control for instructing to automatically switch the camera.
- the control for instructing to automatically switch the camera may be the control 414 in FIG. 4A.
- the mobile phone may automatically determine the camera suitable for the current shooting scene and automatically switch to the determined camera Shooting.
- the above is mainly based on the example that the user actively designates different cameras to shoot according to different shooting scenarios to illustrate that the mobile phone can turn on different cameras to shoot in different shooting scenarios.
- the mobile phone can be switched to different cameras for shooting in different shooting scenarios.
- the zoom magnification K is the reduction / expansion ratio of the first focal length relative to the second focal length.
- the second focal length is the focal length of the first camera, that is, the focal length of the first camera.
- the angle of view imaged on the photosensitive elements of different cameras can be converted into the focal length of the lens corresponding to the same imaging angle of view on the first camera, that is, the focal length of the non-first camera can be converted into the focal length of the first camera, and the converted focal length This is the equivalent focal length.
- the zoom magnification is K
- the zoom magnification K it can be equivalent to that the first camera of the mobile phone shoots with the first focal length corresponding to the zoom magnification K.
- the zoom magnification K can be used to shoot, which is equivalent to the effect of the user moving the mobile phone to a position 5 meters away from the object to shoot the object, which is equivalent to the user to the second focal length Reduced by 2 times, which means that the first focal length is equivalent to 0.5 times the second focal length.
- the zoom magnification K when the zoom magnification K is less than 1, the zoom magnification K can be understood as the reduction ratio of the first focal length relative to the second focal length; when the zoom magnification K is greater than 1, the zoom magnification K can be understood as the first focal length relative to the first Magnification of two focal lengths. When the zoom magnification K is equal to 1, the first focal length can be understood as equal to the second focal length.
- the value range of the zoom magnification K of the mobile phone may be M ⁇ K ⁇ N.
- M tan (B / 2) / tan (A / 2)
- N tan (B / 2) / tan (C / 2)
- A is the angle of view of the second camera
- B is the Angle of view
- C is the angle of view of the third camera
- A is greater than B
- B is greater than C.
- A may be 120 °
- B may be 75 °
- C may be 30 °.
- the zoom magnification K may be less than 1, equal to 1, or greater than 1, and the numerical range of the zoom magnification K is large.
- the zoom magnification K 1
- it may be referred to as a 1 ⁇ shooting scene, that is, a shooting scene of 1 ⁇ focal length (that is, 1 ⁇ main shooting focal length).
- the mobile phone uses the first camera to shoot without zooming.
- the zoom magnification K is not equal to 1, it can be called a zoom shooting scene.
- Mobile phones often need to change the focal length during the image capture process. For example, when a user shoots a distant object (such as people, flowers, buildings, etc.) in a 1 ⁇ shooting scene through a mobile phone, the object displayed in the preview image displayed on the mobile phone will be smaller.
- the mobile phone can perform zoom shooting with a zoom magnification K greater than 1.
- zoom shooting can be performed, and the zoom magnification K is less than 1. That is to say, the zoom magnification K can be understood as the zoom-in / out magnification K (or zoom-in / out ratio K) of the image. The larger the zoom magnification K, the larger the zoom-in / out magnification K of the image, and the larger the size of the object in the preview image.
- the zoom magnification K Larger; the smaller the zoom magnification K, the smaller the image reduction / magnification factor K, and the smaller the size of the object in the preview image.
- the zoomable / zoomable range of the image is also large.
- each camera of the mobile phone has a focal length, and each camera uses its own focal length to collect images.
- the focal length of the second camera may be 16 mm
- the focal length of the first camera may be 27 mm
- the focal length of the third camera may be 80 mm.
- the second camera uses a 16mm focal length to capture images, the zoom factor K is equal to M, and the equivalent focal length is M * 27mm; when the mobile phone uses the first camera to collect images, the first camera uses 27mm
- the zoom magnification K is equal to 1
- the mobile phone uses the third camera to capture images uses an 80mm focal length to capture images, the zoom magnification K is equal to N, and the equivalent focal length is N * 27mm.
- the image collected by the mobile phone using the second camera may be shown in FIG. 5A; the image collected by the mobile phone using the first camera may be shown in FIG. 5B; the image collected by the mobile phone using the third camera may be shown in FIG.
- the mobile phone can crop and enlarge the image collected by the second camera (such as FIG. 5A) to obtain an image corresponding to the zoom factor K greater than M and less than 1 (such as FIG. 5D); the image collected by the first camera ( For example, in Figure 5B), crop and zoom in to obtain an image with a zoom factor K greater than 1 and less than N (for example, Figure 5E); crop and zoom in on the image collected by the third camera to obtain a zoom factor K greater than An image of N (for example, Figure 5F).
- the second camera such as FIG. 5A
- the image collected by the first camera For example, in Figure 5B
- crop and zoom in to obtain an image with a zoom factor K greater than 1 and less than N for example, Figure 5E
- crop and zoom in on the image collected by the third camera to obtain a zoom factor K greater than An image of N (for example, Figure 5F).
- the mobile phone in a 1 ⁇ shooting scene where the zoom magnification K is equal to 1, the mobile phone can use the first camera to shoot, so that the image collected by the first camera with the highest imaging quality can be used to generate a preview image and the captured image to obtain Better shooting results.
- the mobile phone can use the second camera to perform zoom shooting. Therefore, the mobile phone can crop and enlarge the image collected by the second camera according to the zoom magnification K to generate an image corresponding to the zoom magnification K (for example, a preview image or an image obtained by shooting). In this way, the mobile phone can use the second camera with the largest imaging range among the three cameras to shoot to meet the user's shooting requirements for the imaging range.
- the mobile phone may use the first camera to shoot. Therefore, the mobile phone can crop and enlarge the image collected by the first camera according to the zoom magnification K to generate an image corresponding to the zoom magnification K. In this way, the mobile phone can use the first camera with the highest imaging quality, the highest resolution, and the highest pixels among the three cameras to shoot to obtain the best image quality.
- the phone can use the third camera to shoot. Therefore, the mobile phone can crop and enlarge the image collected by the third camera according to the zoom magnification K to generate an image corresponding to the zoom magnification K. In this way, the mobile phone can use a third camera suitable for capturing distant information among the three cameras to shoot, so as to meet the user's need for shooting long-distance and large-size images.
- the mobile phone uses a certain camera to shoot means that the mobile phone turns on the camera and uses the information collected by the camera to generate an image (for example, a preview image or an image obtained by shooting).
- the mobile phone can also turn on other cameras than the camera, but does not use the information collected by the other cameras to generate images. In this way, when the mobile phone wants to switch from the camera to another for shooting, it can achieve fast switching without delay.
- the mobile phone can turn off cameras other than the camera to save power consumption of the mobile phone.
- the mobile phone uses the first camera to shoot means that the mobile phone turns on the first camera and uses the information collected by the first camera to generate an image.
- the mobile phone can also turn on the second camera and the third camera, but does not use the information collected by the second camera and the third camera to generate an image. In this way, when the mobile phone wants to switch from the second camera to the second camera or to the third camera for shooting, it can realize a fast switching without delay. In another case, the mobile phone can turn off the second camera and the third camera to save power consumption of the mobile phone.
- Table 1 above illustrates the case where the mobile phone uses a camera to shoot under the shooting scenarios corresponding to different zoom magnifications.
- the mobile phone can also use a combination of different cameras to shoot.
- image fusion such as wavelet change fusion method, pyramid change fusion method, etc., which is not specifically limited in this embodiment.
- the mobile phone when the zoom magnification satisfies M ⁇ K ⁇ 1, the mobile phone can also use the first camera and / or the third camera to shoot on the basis of shooting with the second camera, so that the image quality is generated by image fusion. High image. That is, the mobile phone can use at least the second camera to shoot.
- the mobile phone when the zoom magnification satisfies 1 ⁇ K ⁇ N, the mobile phone can also use the second camera and / or the third camera to shoot on the basis of shooting with the first camera, so that the image quality is generated through image fusion. High image. That is, the mobile phone can use at least the first camera to shoot.
- the mobile phone when the zoom magnification satisfies K ⁇ N, the mobile phone can also use the second camera and / or the first camera to shoot on the basis of shooting with the third camera, thereby generating a higher imaging quality through image fusion image. That is, the mobile phone can use at least the third camera to shoot.
- the mobile phone uses only one camera suitable for the current shooting scene to shoot in different shooting scenarios, it can save The power consumption and power of the mobile phone; when the camera is used to determine the camera and shoot using the corresponding relationship between the zoom magnification and the camera shown in Table 2, since the mobile phone needs to use multiple cameras to collect information, it is generated by fusing the information collected by the multiple cameras The image, therefore the imaging quality is higher and the shooting effect is better.
- the mobile phone may determine the target zoom magnification according to the user's operation for indicating the zoom magnification, determine the corresponding target camera according to the target zoom magnification, and use the target camera corresponding to the target zoom magnification to shoot.
- the shooting interface displays controls for indicating the zoom magnification (or zoom in / out magnification), such as the 0.6 ⁇ control 601, 1 ⁇ control 602, 2 ⁇ control, 5 ⁇ control, and 10 ⁇ control shown in FIG. 6A. Wait, the current zoom magnification is 1 ⁇ . As shown in FIG.
- the mobile phone when the user clicks on the control 601 to indicate the target zoom magnification of 0.6 ⁇ (or the target zoom magnification of 0.6), the mobile phone can determine the relationship between the zoom magnification and the camera as shown in Table 1 or Table 2.
- the target zoom magnification of 0.6 ⁇ corresponds to the target camera (for example, determined as the second camera according to Table 1), and then an image can be generated based on the target zoom magnification and the information collected by the target camera.
- a zoom magnification scale (or zoom / zoom scale) 701 is displayed on the shooting interface, and the current zoom magnification is 2 ⁇ .
- the mobile phone detects that the user made a gesture (for example, pinch) on the shooting interface (or on the zoom magnification scale) with a finger, in response to the gesture, the mobile phone can determine a target zoom magnification according to the gesture (For example, 1 ⁇ ), the zoom magnification scale can be used to display the target zoom magnification currently determined by the mobile phone according to the gesture on the shooting interface.
- a gesture for example, pinch
- the zoom magnification scale can be used to display the target zoom magnification currently determined by the mobile phone according to the gesture on the shooting interface.
- the mobile phone can determine the target camera corresponding to the target zoom magnification according to the corresponding relationship between the zoom magnification and the camera shown in Table 1 or Table 2 (for example, the first camera is determined according to Table 1), so that it can be based on the target zoom magnification and the target
- the information collected by the camera generates an image.
- the correspondence between the zoom magnification K and the camera is preset in the mobile phone.
- the mobile phone may select different cameras or a combination of different cameras corresponding to the zoom magnification K to shoot according to the correspondence shown in Table 1 or Table 2.
- the mobile phone can determine the target camera corresponding to the target zoom magnification according to the correspondence between the zoom magnification and the camera shown in Table 1.
- the mobile phone can use the penultimate
- the corresponding relationship between the zoom magnification and the camera shown in the second column and the penultimate column determines the target camera corresponding to the target zoom magnification; in the super shooting mode, the mobile phone can use the three cameras shown in the last column of Table 2 to shoot.
- the mobile phone in the high-quality shooting mode, can determine the target camera corresponding to the target zoom magnification according to the corresponding relationship between the zoom magnification and the camera shown in the penultimate column and the penultimate column in Table 2, which can be displayed according to the viewfinder.
- the content on the preview image determines the target camera corresponding to the target zoom magnification.
- the mobile phone may determine that the target camera is the second camera and the third camera. That is, on the basis of shooting with the second camera, the mobile phone can perform image fusion in conjunction with the third camera.
- the field of view of the third camera is small, which can be used to capture the information of the person in the middle position, so that the image of the person part is clearer.
- the mobile phone may determine that the target camera is the second camera and the first camera. That is, on the basis of shooting with the second camera, the mobile phone can perform image fusion in conjunction with the first camera with a central field of view. Due to the high image quality of the fusion part, the field of view of the first camera is larger than the field of view of the third camera. Therefore, compared to shooting with the second camera and the third camera, shooting with the second camera and the first camera makes it possible to perform The field of view of the fused image is larger, so the image in the larger field of view can be made clearer.
- the mobile phone may determine that the target camera is the first camera and the second camera. That is, on the basis of shooting with the first camera, the mobile phone can also take advantage of the wide field of view characteristic of the second camera to acquire a landscape image in a larger range and merge it with the image acquired by the second camera to make the entire landscape image Imaging is clearer.
- the mobile phone can determine that the target camera is the first camera and the third camera, and the third camera with a smaller field angle can be used for Capturing the character information in the middle position makes the image of the character part clearer.
- the mobile phone may determine that the target camera is a third camera and a second camera. That is, on the basis of shooting with the third camera, the mobile phone can also take advantage of the large field of view characteristic of the second camera to acquire landscape images in a larger range.
- the mobile phone may determine that the target camera is the third camera and the first camera. That is, on the basis of shooting with the third camera, the mobile phone can also take advantage of the high imaging quality of the first camera to obtain a clearer image after fusion.
- the mobile phone can also automatically determine the target zoom magnification at the time of shooting according to the object to be photographed, the imaging size of the object to be photographed, or the distance of the object to be photographed, and then according to the zoom magnifications shown in Table 1 or Table 2
- the corresponding relationship of the cameras determines the target camera corresponding to the target zoom magnification, so that an image can be generated according to the information collected by the target zoom magnification and the target camera.
- the mobile phone when taking pictures, can automatically determine the target zoom magnification according to the distance between the object to be photographed and the mobile phone, and then determine the target camera according to the target zoom magnification, and generate an image based on the target zoom magnification and the information collected by the target camera.
- the mobile phone there are many ways for the mobile phone to determine the distance of the object to be photographed.
- the mobile phone can determine the distance of the object to be shot through the parallax of the images collected by the two cameras.
- the mobile phone determines that the target zoom magnification is greater than M and less than 1; when the distance between the object to be photographed and the mobile phone is greater than or equal to the preset value 2 and less than the preset value 3, the mobile phone determines that the target zoom magnification is greater than or equal to 1 and less than N; when the distance between the object to be photographed and the mobile phone is greater than or equal to the preset value 3, the mobile phone determines that the target zoom magnification is greater than or equal to N .
- the preset value 1 is less than the preset value 2
- the preset value 3 is less than the preset value 3.
- the mobile phone when shooting video (ie, video), can also identify the object to be shot according to the image collected by the camera, determine the zoom ratio according to the size of the object in the image, determine the camera according to the zoom ratio, and automatically switch to zoom Shoot with the camera corresponding to the magnification.
- the mobile phone generates a composition according to the image collected by the switched camera, and crops and reduces / expands the image collected by the camera according to the composition and zoom magnification, thereby generating the next frame of video image.
- the mobile phone in the process of shooting video, the mobile phone can automatically zoom, and switch to the corresponding camera in real time to shoot according to the changed zoom magnification.
- the size of the object to be photographed on the image is larger; if the object to be photographed is As the distance of the mobile phone becomes longer, the size of the object to be photographed on the image is smaller, and the user may not be able to clearly see the object to be photographed.
- the distance between the object to be photographed in motion and the mobile phone is usually near and far, and the size of the object to be photographed on the image is also sometimes large and small, which is not convenient for the user to observe and record the object to be photographed.
- the mobile phone can set the reference size of the object to be photographed on the screen (for example, the object to be photographed is a person, the reference size of the person on the image is 1/3 of the entire image size), the reference size is The process is fixed. It can be understood that the reference sizes corresponding to different objects to be photographed may be different.
- the mobile phone can determine the zoom magnification according to the ratio between the actual size of the object to be captured in the image captured in the current frame and the reference size, and the camera to be used to capture the next frame of image according to the zoom magnification.
- the mobile phone collects images according to the determined camera, generates a composition according to the collected image, and performs cropping and reduction / expansion processing on the collected image according to the composition and the determined zoom magnification, so that the actual size of the object to be captured on the image is
- the reference size is basically the same.
- the actual size of the object to be photographed on the image collected by the camera is larger, and the ratio of the reference size to the actual size is less than 1.
- the image reduction / expansion ratio K that is, the zoom magnification K is less than 1.
- the mobile phone can perform image cropping according to the zoom magnification K, so that the size of the object to be photographed on the image is basically unchanged, and the size of the object to be photographed on the image is basically the reference size.
- the actual size of the object to be photographed collected by the camera on the image is small, and the ratio of the reference size to the actual size, that is, the zoom magnification K is greater than 1.
- the mobile phone can cut the screen according to the zoom magnification K, so that the size of the object to be photographed on the image is basically unchanged.
- the mobile phone determines the new zoom magnification in real time, switches to the camera corresponding to the new zoom magnification in real time to collect the image, and processes the collected image in real time according to the new zoom magnification to obtain the object to be photographed
- the size of the video image is basically the same, which is convenient for users to observe and record.
- the zoom magnification range may be M to N, the zoom range is larger, and the zoom freedom is greater.
- this embodiment cuts the screen based on the composition. Since the composition may change dynamically, the picture to be cut requires a large field of view to meet the needs of the picture cut according to the composition.
- the second camera in this embodiment can provide a picture to be cropped with a sufficiently large field of view to meet the cropping requirement.
- the mobile phone may keep the second camera turned on.
- the second camera can capture information in a larger field of view, so the second camera can The subject to be captured after changing to the left or right is captured. Therefore, the mobile phone can perform cropping according to the picture information captured by the second camera, so that the picture recorded during the video shooting process can always include the object to be shot. It can be seen that the second camera can provide a larger cutting range and freedom for the mobile phone.
- the mobile phone when the mobile phone records the little girl playing football, the field of view that the second camera can shoot is relatively large.
- the second camera can collect the image information of the little girl.
- the mobile phone can cut a part of the image collected by the second camera to perform an enlargement process, thereby generating an image during recording.
- the images obtained by the two cameras of the mobile phone are simply fused to obtain the final captured image.
- the method provided in this embodiment can be diverse and changeable.
- the images collected by one or more cameras suitable for the current shooting scene are used to obtain the final captured image, so that a high-quality captured image can be obtained in each shooting scene. Therefore, when the shooting scene changes, the mobile phone can switch to the image captured by one or more cameras suitable for the changed shooting scene in real time to obtain the final captured image, so that in any shooting scene, a higher quality can be obtained Take an image.
- the above is mainly from the perspective of zoom magnification to illustrate that the mobile phone can use different cameras to shoot in different shooting scenarios.
- the following mainly focuses on automatically identifying the shooting scene from the mobile phone, and automatically switching or prompting the user to switch to a camera suitable for the current shooting scene according to the identified shooting scene to take an example to illustrate that the mobile phone can use different cameras to shoot in different shooting scenarios.
- the mobile phone When the volume of the object to be photographed is large, for example, the object to be photographed is a tall building, a long bridge, a group of people or a group of buildings, etc., the mobile phone needs a large imaging field of view when photographing.
- the second camera since the second camera has the largest imaging field of view, when the mobile phone determines that it needs a large imaging field of view, or needs to expand the imaging field of view, it can automatically switch to the second camera for ultra-wide-angle shooting, or can prompt The user switches to the second camera for ultra-wide-angle shooting.
- the zoom magnification K in the ultra-wide-angle shooting mode is less than 1.
- the object to be photographed is the Eiffel Tower
- the control 901 is used to indicate that the mobile phone is currently shooting in the standard mode, that is, the 1 ⁇ shooting mode of the first camera, and the mobile phone recognizes that the Eiffel Tower does not Full shot, the collected image only shows a part of the Eiffel Tower, not including the complete Eiffel Tower. Need to expand the imaging field of view, so the mobile phone can automatically switch to the second camera for shooting, and, referring to FIG. 9B, the mobile phone can also prompt the user to "have automatically switched to the ultra-wide-angle shooting mode", the control 902 is used to indicate that the mobile phone is currently using the ultra-wide-angle mode To shoot. As can be seen from FIG. 9B, when the second camera is used for shooting, the imaging field of view is larger, and the entire Eiffel Tower can be shot completely.
- the object to be photographed is a plurality of people
- the control 1001 is used to indicate that the mobile phone is currently shooting in the standard mode (that is, the 1 ⁇ shooting mode of the first camera), and the mobile phone recognizes the image collected by the first camera
- the mobile phone may prompt the user, "The current field of view is small. Will you switch to a second camera with a larger field of view?". When the user clicks "Yes", the mobile phone switches to the second camera to shoot.
- the mobile phone may prompt the user through the prompt box 1002 on the shooting interface “whether the current field of view is small, whether to switch to the ultra-wide-angle shooting mode”.
- the mobile phone switches to the second camera for ultra-wide-angle shooting, and, referring to FIG. 10B, the mobile phone indicates through the control 1003 that it has currently switched to the ultra-wide-angle shooting mode.
- the control 1003 may disappear automatically after being displayed for a period of time.
- the mobile phone automatically displays the ultra-wide-angle shooting mode control on the shooting interface, so that the user can switch to the second camera for shooting by clicking the ultra-wide-angle shooting mode control.
- the mobile phone automatically displays a zoom magnification control on the shooting interface.
- the zoom magnification control indicates that the zoom magnification K is less than 1, for example, it can be 0.6 ⁇ , so that the user can easily switch to the Two cameras to shoot.
- the mobile phone can prompt the user by voice "whether to switch to the second camera to take a larger range of pictures", if the user voice input "Yes", or the user voice input "switch” and other instructions to switch Sentence, the phone switches to the second camera to shoot.
- the mobile phone turns on the first camera to shoot.
- the ultra-wide-angle shooting mode control is displayed on the shooting interface.
- click the ultra-wide-angle shooting mode and the mobile phone can switch to the second camera to shoot.
- the mobile phone can also automatically switch back to using the first camera for shooting. For example, when the camera of the mobile phone moves away from the Eiffel Tower and the object to be photographed is switched to a smaller object, the mobile phone determines that it does not need a large imaging field of view. A camera to shoot. Or, when the mobile phone uses the second camera for shooting this time, it can automatically switch back to using the first camera for shooting.
- the mobile phone uses the second camera to shoot in the ultra-wide-angle shooting scene.
- the mobile phone may also shoot with the second camera and other cameras.
- the mobile phone can at least use the second camera to shoot.
- the mobile phone detects that the distance between the object to be photographed and the mobile phone is less than or equal to a preset value 4 (for example, the preset value 4 may be 10 cm), the distance between the object to be photographed and the mobile phone is very close, and the current shooting scene is a macro shooting scene.
- the macro shooting scene the size of the object to be photographed on the preview image is large, and the mobile phone can capture information in a larger field of view through the second camera, so as to capture the complete information of the object to be photographed as much as possible.
- the mobile phone can determine the distance between the object to be photographed and the mobile phone through the distance sensor 180F.
- the mobile phone may determine the distance between the object to be photographed and the mobile phone through a preset focusing algorithm. When the distance is less than or equal to the preset value 4, the mobile phone can determine that the distance between the object to be photographed and the mobile phone is short, so it can automatically switch to the second camera to shoot, or prompt the user to switch to the second camera to shoot.
- the object to be photographed is a flower
- the control 1101 is used to indicate that the mobile phone is currently shooting in the standard mode (that is, the 1 ⁇ shooting mode of the first camera), and the mobile phone determines that the distance between the object to be photographed and the mobile phone is less than Or equal to the preset value 4, the mobile phone displays "the shooting distance is very close, switch to macro mode?"
- the prompt box 1102 if the user selects "Yes", as shown in FIG. 11B, the mobile phone switches to the micro In the distance mode, the second camera is used for shooting.
- the control 1103 is used to indicate that it is currently in the macro shooting mode.
- a close control 1104 is also displayed on the shooting interface. When the user clicks the close control 1104, the mobile phone no longer displays the control 1103.
- the mobile phone can use the first camera to shoot.
- a macro shooting mode control is displayed on the shooting interface.
- the mobile phone can switch to the second camera for macro shooting.
- the mobile phone can switch back to use the first camera to shoot. Or, when the mobile phone uses the second camera for shooting this time, it can automatically switch back to using the first camera for shooting.
- the mobile phone can move the position or movement of the photosensitive element in the second camera through the built-in motor (or motor)
- the position of the lens of the second camera is to increase the image distance, so that the second camera can focus, so that the macro shooting scene can be imaged clearly.
- the mobile phone uses a second camera to shoot in a macro shooting scene.
- the mobile phone may also shoot in combination with the second camera and other cameras. That is to say, in the macro shooting scene, the mobile phone can at least use the second camera to shoot, which will not be repeated here.
- the mobile phone determines that the distance to the object to be photographed is greater than or equal to a preset value of 5 (for example, 5 meters), it can be determined that the current scene is a distant scene, so a smaller field of view and a longer focal length can be used.
- the third camera for distant shooting is used for shooting. Specifically, the mobile phone may automatically switch when it is determined that the distance to the object to be photographed is greater than or equal to the preset value 5, or prompt the user to switch, or switch to the third camera for remote shooting after receiving the user's instruction.
- the zoom magnification K is large, for example, the zoom magnification K may be greater than N.
- the object to be shot is a football on the other end of the football field.
- the mobile phone determines that the distance between the object to be shot and the mobile phone is far, the mobile phone can automatically switch to use the third camera for distant shooting.
- the control 1201 is used to indicate that the current shooting scene is a distant shooting mode.
- the mobile phone After the camera of the mobile phone moves away from the object to be photographed far away, the mobile phone can switch back to adopt the first camera to shoot. Or, when the mobile phone uses the third camera for shooting this time, it can automatically switch back to using the first camera for shooting.
- the mobile phone uses a third camera to shoot in a distant shooting scene.
- the mobile phone may also shoot with the third camera and other cameras. That is to say, in the distant shooting scene, the mobile phone can at least use the third camera to shoot, which will not be repeated here.
- the above is an example of switching between a 1 ⁇ normal shooting scene and a super wide-angle shooting scene, or a case of switching between a 1 ⁇ normal shooting scene and a distant shooting scene, or a 1 ⁇ normal shooting Switching between the scene and the macro shooting scene is explained as an example.
- the mobile phone can also switch between 1 ⁇ normal shooting scene, super wide-angle shooting scene, distant shooting scene and macro shooting scene, and switch to the camera suitable for the current shooting scene in real time for shooting, which will not be repeated here.
- the images obtained by the two cameras of the mobile phone are simply merged to obtain the final captured image.
- the method provided in this embodiment can be used in a variety of and variable shooting In the scene, the camera or a combination of cameras suitable for the current shooting scene is switched in real time to obtain an image, thereby generating an image obtained by the final shooting, so that a high-quality shot image can be obtained in each shooting scene.
- the mobile phone when taking a picture, can automatically recognize the object to be photographed, compose a composition according to the object to be photographed, and prompt the user to perform a shooting operation according to the composition instruction to obtain a better shooting effect.
- the mobile phone can instruct the user to pan the phone up, down, left, right, front, and back according to the composition, or prompt the user to rotate the hand phone up, down, left, or right, or to prompt the user to flip the phone forward and back.
- the mobile phone may prompt the user to move the mobile phone to the target position according to the prompt; referring to FIG. 13B, the mobile phone may prompt the user to turn the mobile phone forward.
- the mobile phone if the mobile phone currently uses the camera 1 for shooting, a first composition is generated based on the first image collected by the second camera and a preset composition algorithm, and an image preview is performed, and the camera 1 is not the second camera, the mobile phone also The second camera can be turned on. After the second camera is turned on, the mobile phone can check the first composition according to the image of the larger field of view collected by the second camera to determine whether the first composition is reasonable.
- the field of view of the second image collected by the second camera since the field of view of the second image collected by the second camera is larger, it may include more information than the image collected by the camera 1, and the second composition generated based on more information is more accurate, that is, the mobile phone according to The composition generated by the second image is more accurate.
- the mobile phone determines that the part of the second composition that corresponds to the first image is consistent with the first composition, the mobile phone determines that the first composition is reasonable, the first composition matches the second composition, and the mobile phone uses the first composition to prompt the user to shoot operating.
- the mobile phone determines that the part of the composition corresponding to the first image in the second composition is inconsistent with the first composition, determines that the first composition is unreasonable, and the mobile phone may prompt the user to perform a shooting operation according to the second composition. Or, if the mobile phone determines that the first composition is unreasonable, the mobile phone automatically switches to use the second camera for composition and shooting. Or, if the mobile phone determines that the first composition is unreasonable, the mobile phone may prompt the user whether to switch to the second camera with a larger field of view for composition and shooting. For example, referring to FIG. 13C, the mobile phone may prompt the user through a prompt box 1301 whether to switch to a camera with a larger field of view for composition and shooting.
- the phone switches to the second camera for composition and shooting, so that the range of the field of view can be expanded without changing the position; if the user selects "No", the phone uses the camera 1 for composition And shooting. That is to say, using the feature of the second camera having a large field of view, the mobile phone can obtain a more reasonable composition, thereby prompting the user to shoot according to a more reasonable composition to obtain a better shooting effect.
- the second composition generated from the image collected by the second camera includes the small Girls, flowers, moms and kittens are their respective positions, and the position of the little girl, flowers, mom in the image is more to the right, so the mobile phone determines that the first composition generated from the image collected by the second camera is unreasonable, and the mobile phone switches To the second camera, the second composition generated based on the image collected by the second camera prompts the user to perform a shooting operation, and finally shoots to obtain the image as shown in FIG. 13D.
- the mobile phone may acquire the image collected by the camera, and process the acquired image to obtain the image of the object to be photographed.
- the process may include:
- the mobile phone determines the number of frames captured by each of the three cameras.
- One method is that the mobile phone controls each camera to collect images corresponding to the number of frames according to the brightness of the environment in which the object to be photographed is located. For example, when the brightness is low, the mobile phone can control each camera to collect more frames of images. When the brightness is large, the mobile phone can control each camera to collect images with fewer frames. This is because the brightness of the object to be photographed can affect the signal-to-noise ratio of the image collected by the camera. If the brightness is small, the signal-to-noise of the collected image is relatively low, that is, the ratio of effective signal to noise in the collected image is low, and the noise accounted for a large component.
- the mobile phone can control the camera to collect more frames of images. If the brightness is large, the signal-to-noise of the collected image is relatively large, that is, the ratio of effective signal to noise in the collected image is large, that is, the component of the noise is small. At this time, there is no need to collect more images to get enough effective signals, so the mobile phone can control the camera to collect fewer frames of images.
- the mobile phone can also determine the number of frames captured by each camera in other ways, which is not specifically limited in this embodiment.
- each camera collects images corresponding to the number of frames.
- the mobile phone can preprocess the images collected by each camera separately.
- the pretreatment process is as follows:
- the mobile phone can perform noise reduction processing on the images collected by each camera, and fuse all the frame images after the noise reduction processing to obtain an image with a relatively high signal-to-noise ratio.
- each camera corresponds to an image with a relatively high signal-to-noise ratio.
- the mobile phone can fuse the image corresponding to each camera again to initially obtain an image of the object to be photographed, and the image can be directly used as the final image of the object to be photographed.
- the mobile phone may further process the image of the object to be photographed initially obtained.
- the mobile phone may perform image enhancement processing on the initially obtained image of the object to be captured according to the scene depth information, so as to improve the quality of the final image of the object to be captured.
- the mobile phone may determine the scene depth information in various ways.
- the mobile phone can determine the depth information of the scene through the parallax of the images collected by the two cameras. For example, when K is greater than or equal to 1 and less than N, the phone can generate depth information based on the images collected by the second camera and the first camera; when K is greater than or equal to N, the phone can use the second camera and the first camera The acquired images are used to generate depth information.
- this embodiment is not specifically limited.
- the mobile phone may perform image enhancement processing on the image of the object to be initially captured according to the scene depth information.
- the mobile phone may only perform image enhancement processing of contrast and sharpness on the overall image of the object to be captured initially based on scene depth information, so as to improve the three-dimensional and layered sense of the final image of the object to be captured.
- the mobile phone can perform image enhancement processing only on the foreground, such as the sharpness of the portrait, in the image of the object to be captured based on the depth information of the scene, without processing the sharpness of the background, or blurring the image, similar to the user The situation of taking pictures with a large aperture to achieve personalized shooting.
- the mobile phone can also perform image enhancement processing on the clarity of the area selected by the user on the image of the subject to be initially captured according to the depth information of the scene, without processing other areas or performing image blur processing, similar to the user first taking a picture Focusing effect to achieve personalized shooting.
- the mobile phone may output the image of the object to be photographed, for example, displayed on the display screen of the mobile phone.
- this embodiment is not specifically limited.
- this embodiment provides a shooting method, which can be implemented in electronic devices (such as mobile phones, tablet computers, etc.) with touch screens as shown in FIGS. 1 and 3.
- the electronic device includes a wide-angle color camera (that is, the first camera), an ultra-wide-angle color camera (that is, the second camera), and a telephoto color camera (that is, the third camera).
- the method may include the following steps:
- Step 1401 The electronic device detects the first operation of the user for turning on the camera.
- the first operation that the user uses to open the camera may be an operation that the user clicks the camera app icon on the electronic device.
- Step 1402 In response to the first operation, the electronic device displays a shooting interface on the touch screen.
- the electronic device can enter the shooting mode and display the shooting interface in response to the first operation of the user for turning on the camera.
- the shooting interface may be the interface shown in FIG. 4A, FIG. 4B, FIG. 4C, or FIG. 6A.
- Step 1403. The electronic device captures the image through the wide-angle color camera.
- the wide-angle color camera is a wide-angle color camera.
- the wide-angle color camera has the best imaging quality and a large field of view, so it can be used.
- the wide-angle color camera is used as the main camera to shoot, and the wide-angle color camera is used to capture images by default.
- Step 1404 The electronic device displays the image captured by the wide-angle color camera on the touch screen.
- the image captured by the wide-angle color camera displayed on the touch screen may be the image of the Eiffel Tower shown in FIG. 6A.
- Step 1405 The electronic device detects the second operation of the user to instruct zooming.
- the second operation for the user to instruct zooming may be, as shown in FIG. 6B, the user clicks an operation for instructing a zoom magnification control (eg, control 601).
- the second operation for the user to instruct zooming may also be a user's pinch operation as shown in FIG. 7B.
- Step 1406 In response to the second operation, the electronic device switches to capture the image through the ultra-wide-angle color camera or the telephoto color camera.
- the electronic device may switch to the ultra-wide-angle color camera to capture the image.
- the electronic device displays the image captured by the ultra-wide-angle color camera or the telephoto color camera on the touch screen.
- the electronic device may switch to the ultra-wide-angle color camera to capture the image may be the image of the Eiffel Tower shown in FIG. 6B .
- the user can perform zoom instructions according to the current shooting scene, and the electronic device can automatically switch between the wide-angle color camera, the ultra-wide-angle color camera, and the telephoto color camera according to the user's zoom instruction, thereby passing Matching with the user's zoom indication, the camera can adapt to the current shooting scene to capture and shoot images, and obtain better shooting results.
- the shooting interface includes at least one first control for indicating the zoom magnification
- the second operation is a user's preset operation for the first control.
- the first control may be the control 601, the control 602, etc. shown in FIG. 6A, FIG. 6B, or may be the zoom magnification scale in FIG. 7A and FIG. 7B, etc.
- the shooting interface includes at least one second control for instructing the camera, and the second operation is a user's preset operation for the second control.
- the second control may be control 401-control 403 in FIG. 4A, or control 404-control 406 shown in FIG. 4B, or the like.
- the electronic device can first determine the zoom magnification, and then can automatically switch to a camera corresponding to the zoom magnification to capture an image according to the correspondence between the zoom magnification and the camera shown in Table 1.
- the above step 1406 may include: in response to the second operation, the electronic device determines the zoom magnification K; if M ⁇ K ⁇ 1, the electronic device switches to capturing the image through the ultra-wide-angle color camera, and through the wide-angle color The camera and / or telephoto color camera captures the image; if K ⁇ N, the electronic device switches to capture the image through the telephoto color camera and captures the image through the wide-angle color camera and / or ultra-wide-angle color camera.
- the electronic device can first determine the zoom magnification, and then can automatically switch to multiple cameras corresponding to the zoom magnification to capture images according to the correspondence between the zoom magnification and the cameras shown in Table 2, so as to improve the image imaging quality.
- the electronic device may also automatically switch the camera.
- the method may further include:
- the electronic device automatically switches to capturing the image through the ultra-wide-angle color camera .
- the first preset value may be the preset value 4, as shown in FIGS. 11A-11B, if the distance between the object to be photographed and the electronic device is less than or equal to the preset value 4, the current shooting mode is macro mode, The electronic device automatically switches to the ultra-wide-angle color camera to capture the image.
- the electronic device automatically switches to capturing the image through the telephoto color camera ,
- the second preset value is greater than the first preset value.
- the first preset value may be the preset value 5, as shown in FIG. 12, if the distance between the object to be photographed and the electronic device is greater than or equal to the preset value 5, the current shooting mode is the distant view mode, and the electronic device automatically switches Go to the telephoto color camera to capture the image.
- the method may further include:
- the electronic device automatically switches to capturing the image through the ultra-wide-angle color camera.
- the current camera used to capture the image is a wide-angle color camera
- the object to be photographed is the Eiffel Tower.
- the preview image of the shooting interface shown in FIG. 9A only shows a part of the object to be photographed, but the complete image to be photographed cannot be displayed
- the electronic device can automatically switch to a wide-angle color camera with a wider field of view to capture images.
- the current camera used to capture the image is a wide-angle color camera
- the object to be photographed is a group of people.
- the preview image of the shooting interface shown in FIG. 10A shows only a part of the object to be photographed, but the complete image cannot be displayed.
- the electronic device can automatically switch to a wide-angle color camera with a wider field of view to capture the image.
- the method may further include:
- the electronic device generates a first composition according to the first image captured by the camera currently used to capture the image.
- the camera currently used to capture the image is a wide-angle color camera
- the first image may be the preview image shown in FIG. 13A or 13B.
- the electronic device If the camera currently used to capture the image is a wide-angle color camera or a telephoto color camera, the electronic device also captures the second image through the ultra-wide-angle color camera.
- the current camera used to capture the image is a wide-angle color camera, not an ultra-wide-angle color camera, the electronic device also captures the second image through the ultra-wide-angle color camera.
- the electronic device generates a second composition according to the second image captured by the ultra-wide-angle color camera.
- the electronic device prompts the user whether to switch the camera.
- the electronic device may prompt the user whether to switch the camera.
- the electronic device may prompt the user through the prompt box 1301 shown in FIG. 13C whether to switch to a camera with a larger field of view for composition and shooting.
- the electronic device stops capturing the image through the camera currently used to capture the image.
- the operation for the user to instruct to switch the camera may be an operation in which the user selects "Yes" on the prompt box 1301, and in response to the operation, the electronic device may stop capturing the image through the wide-angle color camera.
- the electronic device prompts the user to shoot according to the second image and the second composition captured by the ultra-wide-angle color camera.
- the image frame captured by the electronic device according to the ultra-wide-angle color camera can be seen in FIG. 13D.
- the electronic device may continue to prompt the user to take the first image and the first composition captured by the wide-angle color camera. If the user's operation for instructing not to switch the camera is detected, or if the user's operation for instructing to switch the camera is not detected, the electronic device may continue to prompt the user to take the first image and the first composition captured by the wide-angle color camera.
- the method may further include:
- the electronic device captures the image through the camera currently used to capture the image and the long wide-angle color camera.
- the electronic device synthesizes the image captured by the camera currently used to capture the image and the image captured by the long wide-angle color camera.
- the electronic device displays the synthesized image on the touch screen.
- the electronic device can continue to capture the image through the camera currently used to capture the image, and can also combine the wider field-of-view characteristics of the ultra-wide-angle color camera to capture the landscape within a larger field of view Picture, thus merging the pictures captured by the two cameras to help users record pictures of more open landscapes.
- the method may further include:
- the electronic device detects a third operation that the user uses to instruct recording.
- the third operation may be an operation in which the user clicks the recording control in FIG. 4A.
- the electronic device displays the shooting interface in the recording mode in response to the third operation.
- the electronic device automatically zooms according to the size of the object to be photographed on the shooting interface, or according to the distance between the object to be photographed and the electronic device.
- the electronic device may set a reference size of the object to be photographed on the screen, and the reference size is fixed during the photographing process.
- the electronic device can determine the zoom magnification and automatically zoom according to the ratio between the actual size of the object to be shot and the reference size in the image obtained by shooting in the current frame.
- the electronic device may set a preset value of the distance between the object to be photographed and the electronic device (eg, the aforementioned preset value 1, preset value 2, or preset value 3).
- the electronic device may determine the zoom magnification according to the relationship between the distance between the current object to be photographed and the electronic device and the preset value, and automatically zoom.
- the electronic device automatically switches the camera used to capture the image according to the zoom result.
- the electronic device determines the camera to be used for shooting the next image according to the zoom magnification, so as to automatically switch to the camera corresponding to the zoom magnification to capture the image.
- the method further includes: the electronic device prompts the user on the touch screen of the camera currently used to capture the image, the current zoom magnification or the current shooting mode, so that the user can know the camera currently used to capture the image in real time and / Or the current zoom ratio.
- the electronic device prompts the user through the display control 702 that the current zoom magnification is 2 ⁇ .
- the electronic device prompts the user through the display control 902 that the user is currently in the ultra-wide-angle shooting mode.
- the electronic device prompts the user that the camera currently used to capture the image is a wide-angle color camera by bolding the border of the control 405 or highlighting the control 405.
- the electronic device includes hardware and / or software modules corresponding to performing each function.
- the present application can be implemented in the form of hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software. Whether a function is executed by hardware or computer software driven hardware depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution. A person skilled in the art may use different methods to implement the described functions for each specific application in combination with the embodiments, but such implementation should not be considered beyond the scope of the present application.
- the electronic device may be divided into function modules according to the above method examples.
- each function module may be divided corresponding to each function, or two or more functions may be integrated into one processing module.
- the above integrated module can be implemented in the form of hardware. It should be noted that the division of the modules in this embodiment is schematic, and is only a division of logical functions. In actual implementation, there may be another division manner.
- FIG. 16 shows a schematic diagram of a possible composition of the electronic device 1600 involved in the above embodiment.
- the electronic device 1600 may include: a detection unit 1601, a display unit 1602, and a processing unit 1603.
- the detection unit 1601 may be used to support the electronic device 1600 to perform the above steps 1401, 1405, 1420, etc., and / or other processes used in the technology described herein.
- the display unit 1602 may be used to support the electronic device 1600 to perform the above steps 1402, 1404, 1407, 1419, 1421, etc., and / or other processes for the technology described herein.
- the processing unit 1603 may be used to support the electronic device 1600 to perform the above steps 1403, step 1406, steps 1408-1418, step 1422, step 1423, etc., and / or other processes for the technology described herein.
- the electronic device provided in this embodiment is used to execute the above image capturing method, and therefore can achieve the same effect as the above implementation method.
- the electronic device may include a processing module, a storage module, and a communication module.
- the processing module may be used to control and manage the actions of the electronic device. For example, it may be used to support the electronic device to execute the steps performed by the detection unit 1601, the display unit 1602, and the processing unit 1603.
- the storage module can be used to support electronic devices to store images captured by the camera, as well as store program codes and data.
- the communication module can be used to support communication between electronic devices and other devices.
- the processing module may be a processor or a controller. It can implement or execute various exemplary logical blocks, modules, and circuits described in conjunction with the disclosure of the present application.
- the processor may also be a combination of computing functions, such as a combination of one or more microprocessors, a combination of digital signal processing (DSP) and a microprocessor, and so on.
- the storage module may be a memory.
- the communication module may specifically be a device that interacts with other electronic devices, such as a radio frequency circuit, a Bluetooth chip, or a Wi-Fi chip.
- the electronic device involved in this embodiment may be a device having the structure shown in FIG. 1.
- one or more computer programs are stored in the internal memory 121 and configured to be executed by one or more processors.
- the one or more computer programs include instructions.
- the above instructions can be used to execute various steps performed by the electronic device as shown in FIG. 14 and the corresponding embodiments. In some other embodiments, the above instructions may also be used to perform various steps performed by the electronic device in FIG. 15 and the corresponding embodiments.
- This embodiment also provides a computer storage medium in which computer instructions are stored.
- the computer instructions run on an electronic device, the electronic device executes the above-mentioned related method steps to implement the image capturing method in the above embodiment.
- This embodiment also provides a computer program product.
- the computer program product runs on a computer, the computer is caused to perform the above-mentioned relevant steps to implement the image capturing method in the above embodiment.
- the embodiments of the present application also provide an apparatus.
- the apparatus may specifically be a chip, a component, or a module.
- the apparatus may include a connected processor and a memory; wherein the memory is used to store computer-executed instructions.
- the processor may execute computer execution instructions stored in the memory to cause the chip to execute the image capturing method in each of the above method embodiments.
- the electronic device, computer storage medium, computer program product or chip provided in this embodiment are used to perform the corresponding methods provided above, therefore, for the beneficial effects that can be achieved, refer to the corresponding provided above The beneficial effects of the method will not be repeated here.
- the disclosed device and method may be implemented in other ways.
- the device embodiments described above are only schematic.
- the division of the modules or units is only a division of logical functions.
- the displayed or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
- the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may be one physical unit or multiple physical units, that is, may be located in one place, or may be distributed in multiple different places . Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution of this embodiment.
- each functional unit in the above embodiments may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist alone physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
- the above integrated unit can be implemented in the form of hardware or software function unit.
- the integrated unit is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it may be stored in a readable storage medium.
- the technical solution of this embodiment essentially or part of the contribution to the existing technology or all or part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, which is stored in a storage medium It includes several instructions to enable a device (which may be a single-chip microcomputer, chip, etc.) or processor to execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in the above embodiments.
- the foregoing storage media include various media that can store program codes, such as a USB flash drive, a mobile hard disk, a read-only memory (ROM), a random access memory (RAM), a magnetic disk, or an optical disk.
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Multimedia (AREA)
- Signal Processing (AREA)
- Human Computer Interaction (AREA)
- Studio Devices (AREA)
Abstract
Description
本实施例涉及电子技术领域,尤其涉及一种图像捕捉方法及电子设备。This embodiment relates to the field of electronic technology, and in particular, to an image capturing method and an electronic device.
双摄像头系统,尤其是异构双摄像头系统,由于其差异化优势互补的特点,可以使得在保持较低模组高度的前提下,提升成像质量和成像功能多样性。对于手机制造商而言,既能保持手机轻薄的特性,又能提升拍照质量,还能开发各种各样的趣味性应用,因此双摄像头系统越来越受手机厂商的青睐,正逐步成为当下各旗舰手机的标配。Dual-camera systems, especially heterogeneous dual-camera systems, can improve imaging quality and imaging function diversity while maintaining a low module height due to their complementary advantages of differentiated advantages. For mobile phone manufacturers, they can not only maintain the thin and light characteristics of mobile phones, but also improve the quality of photos and develop a variety of interesting applications. Therefore, the dual camera system is more and more popular with mobile phone manufacturers and is gradually becoming the current. Standard for all flagship phones.
为了提高拍摄效果,越来越多的手机等电子设备采用双摄像头进行拍摄,利用两个摄像头获取的图像信息之间的差异,进行图像信息的互补,提升拍摄获得的图像的质量。In order to improve the shooting effect, more and more electronic devices such as mobile phones use dual cameras to shoot, and use the difference between the image information obtained by the two cameras to complement the image information and improve the quality of the captured images.
目前,手机等电子设备通过双摄像头拍摄图像时,通过将两个摄像头获取的图像进行简单融合来得到最终的图像。实际上,拍摄场景是多样、多变的,将两个摄像头获取的图像进行简单融合的方法无法在多样、变化的拍摄场景下拍摄出质量较高的图像。At present, when an electronic device such as a mobile phone takes an image through a dual camera, the image obtained by the two cameras is simply fused to obtain the final image. In fact, the shooting scenes are diverse and changeable, and the method of simply fusing the images obtained by the two cameras cannot capture high-quality images under the diverse and changing shooting scenes.
发明内容Summary of the invention
本实施例提供一种图像捕捉方法及电子设备,能够在不同拍摄场景下切换到不同的摄像头进行拍摄,提高图像的拍摄效果。This embodiment provides an image capturing method and an electronic device, which can switch to different cameras for shooting under different shooting scenes to improve the shooting effect of the image.
为达到上述目的,本实施例采用如下技术方案:To achieve the above purpose, this embodiment uses the following technical solutions:
一方面,本技术方案提供了一种图像捕捉方法,应用于具有触摸屏的电子设备。该电子设备包括广角彩色摄像头、超广角彩色摄像头和长焦彩色摄像头。该方法包括:在电子设备检测到用户用于打开相机的第一操作后,响应于第一操作,电子设备在触摸屏上显示拍摄界面。电子设备通过广角彩色摄像头捕捉图像,并在触摸屏上显示广角彩色摄像头捕捉到的图像。在电子设备检测到用户用于指示变焦的第二操作后,响应于第二操作,电子设备切换到通过超广角彩色摄像头或长焦彩色摄像头捕捉图像,并在触摸屏上显示超广角彩色摄像头或长焦彩色摄像头捕捉到的图像。On the one hand, the technical solution provides an image capturing method, which is applied to an electronic device with a touch screen. The electronic device includes a wide-angle color camera, an ultra-wide-angle color camera, and a telephoto color camera. The method includes: after the electronic device detects the first operation of the user for turning on the camera, in response to the first operation, the electronic device displays the shooting interface on the touch screen. The electronic device captures the image through the wide-angle color camera, and displays the image captured by the wide-angle color camera on the touch screen. After the electronic device detects the second operation of the user for instructing zooming, in response to the second operation, the electronic device switches to capturing an image through the ultra-wide-angle color camera or telephoto color camera, and displays the ultra-wide-angle color camera or Image captured by a defocused color camera.
这样,用户可以根据当前拍摄场景进行变焦指示,电子设备可以根据用户的变焦指示自动在广角彩色摄像头、超广角彩色摄像头和长焦彩色摄像头之间进行切换,从而利用与用户的变焦指示相匹配的,能够适应于当前拍摄场景的摄像头进行图像捕捉和拍摄,获得较好的拍摄效果。In this way, the user can make a zoom instruction according to the current shooting scene, and the electronic device can automatically switch between the wide-angle color camera, the ultra-wide-angle color camera, and the telephoto color camera according to the user's zoom instruction, so as to use the matching , The camera that can adapt to the current shooting scene can capture and shoot images to obtain better shooting results.
在一种可能的实现方式中,拍摄界面上包括至少一个用于指示变焦倍率的第一控件,第二操作为用户针对第一控件的预设操作。从而,可以方便用户通过第一控件指示变焦。In a possible implementation manner, the shooting interface includes at least one first control for indicating a zoom magnification, and the second operation is a user's preset operation for the first control. Therefore, it is convenient for the user to instruct zooming through the first control.
在一种可能的实现方式中,拍摄界面上包括至少一个用于指示摄像头的第二控件, 第二操作为用户针对第二控件的预设操作。从而,可以方便用户通过第二控件指示变焦。In a possible implementation manner, the shooting interface includes at least one second control for instructing the camera, and the second operation is a user's preset operation for the second control. Therefore, it is convenient for the user to instruct zooming through the second control.
在另一种可能的实现方式中,响应于第二操作,电子设备切换到通过超广角彩色摄像头或长焦彩色摄像头捕捉图像,包括:响应于第二操作,电子设备确定变焦倍率K。其中,若M≤K<1,则电子设备切换到通过超广角彩色摄像头捕捉图像。若K≥N,则电子设备切换到通过长焦彩色摄像头捕捉图像。此外,若1≤K<N,则电子设备通过广角彩色摄像头捕捉图像。其中,M=tan(B/2)/tan(A/2),N=tan(B/2)/tan(C/2),A为超广角彩色摄像头的视场角,B为广角彩色摄像头的视场角,C为长焦彩色摄像头的视场角,且A大于B,B大于C。In another possible implementation manner, in response to the second operation, the electronic device switches to capturing an image through an ultra-wide-angle color camera or a telephoto color camera, including: in response to the second operation, the electronic device determines the zoom magnification K. Among them, if M≤K <1, the electronic device switches to capturing images through the ultra-wide-angle color camera. If K≥N, the electronic device switches to capturing the image through the telephoto color camera. In addition, if 1 ≦ K <N, the electronic device captures the image through the wide-angle color camera. Among them, M = tan (B / 2) / tan (A / 2), N = tan (B / 2) / tan (C / 2), A is the angle of view of the ultra-wide-angle color camera, and B is the wide-angle color camera The angle of view of C, C is the angle of view of the telephoto color camera, and A is greater than B, B is greater than C.
也就是说,电子设备可以根据用户的第二操作确定变焦倍率,根据变焦倍率确定对应的一个摄像头,从而切换到该摄像头进行拍摄。That is to say, the electronic device may determine the zoom magnification according to the second operation of the user, and determine a corresponding camera according to the zoom magnification, so as to switch to the camera to shoot.
在另一种可能的实现方式中,响应于第二操作,电子设备切换到通过超广角彩色摄像头或长焦彩色摄像头捕捉图像,包括:响应于第二操作,电子设备确定变焦倍率K。若M≤K<1,则电子设备切换到通过超广角彩色摄像头捕捉图像,以及通过广角彩色摄像头和/或长焦彩色摄像头捕捉图像。若K≥N,则电子设备切换到通过长焦彩色摄像头捕捉图像,以及通过广角彩色摄像头和/或超广角彩色摄像头捕捉图像。In another possible implementation manner, in response to the second operation, the electronic device switches to capturing an image through an ultra-wide-angle color camera or a telephoto color camera, including: in response to the second operation, the electronic device determines the zoom magnification K. If M≤K <1, the electronic device switches to capturing images through the ultra-wide-angle color camera and capturing images through the wide-angle color camera and / or telephoto color camera. If K≥N, the electronic device switches to capturing images through a telephoto color camera, and capturing images through a wide-angle color camera and / or ultra-wide-angle color camera.
也就是说,电子设备可以根据用户的第二操作确定变焦倍率,根据变焦倍率确定对应的多个摄像头,从而通过该多个摄像头进行拍摄。That is to say, the electronic device may determine the zoom magnification according to the second operation of the user, and determine the corresponding multiple cameras according to the zoom magnification, so as to shoot through the multiple cameras.
在另一种可能的实现方式中,在电子设备检测到用户用于指示变焦的第二操作之前,该方法还包括:若当前用于捕捉图像的摄像头为广角彩色摄像头或长焦彩色摄像头,待拍摄对象与电子设备的距离小于或者等于第一预设值,则电子设备自动切换到通过超广角彩色摄像头捕捉图像。若当前用于捕捉图像的摄像头为广角彩色摄像头或超广角彩色摄像头,待拍摄对象与电子设备的距离大于或者等于第二预设值,则电子设备自动切换到通过长焦彩色摄像头捕捉图像,第二预设值大于第一预设值。In another possible implementation, before the electronic device detects the second operation of the user to instruct zooming, the method further includes: if the camera currently used to capture the image is a wide-angle color camera or a telephoto color camera, wait If the distance between the shooting object and the electronic device is less than or equal to the first preset value, the electronic device automatically switches to capturing the image through the ultra-wide-angle color camera. If the current camera for capturing images is a wide-angle color camera or an ultra-wide-angle color camera, and the distance between the object to be photographed and the electronic device is greater than or equal to the second preset value, the electronic device automatically switches to capturing the image through the telephoto color camera. The second preset value is greater than the first preset value.
这样,电子设备可以根据待拍摄对象与电子设备之间的距离的大小,自动切换到与当前距离相匹配的摄像头进行拍摄,以获得较好的拍摄效果。In this way, the electronic device can automatically switch to the camera that matches the current distance for shooting according to the distance between the object to be photographed and the electronic device, so as to obtain a better shooting effect.
示例性的,待拍摄对象与电子设备的距离小于或者等于第一预设值时,当前可以为微距模式;待拍摄对象与电子设备的距离小于第二预设值,当前可以为远景模式。Exemplarily, when the distance between the object to be photographed and the electronic device is less than or equal to the first preset value, it may currently be in macro mode; the distance between the object to be photographed and the electronic device is less than the second preset value, which may be currently in the distant view mode.
在另一种可能的实现方式中,在电子设备检测到用户用于指示变焦的第二操作之前,该方法还包括:若当前用于捕捉图像的摄像头为广角彩色摄像头或长焦彩色摄像头,且触摸屏上显示的捕捉到的图像包括待拍摄对象的一部分,则电子设备自动切换到通过超广角彩色摄像头捕捉图像。In another possible implementation manner, before the electronic device detects the second operation for the user to instruct zooming, the method further includes: if the camera currently used to capture the image is a wide-angle color camera or a telephoto color camera, and The captured image displayed on the touch screen includes a part of the object to be photographed, and the electronic device automatically switches to capturing the image through the ultra-wide-angle color camera.
若待拍摄对象仅被拍摄到一部分,而未被完整捕捉到,从而未能在触摸屏上完整显示,则在电子设备的位置不动的情况下,需要扩大拍摄的视场角,因而电子设备可以自动切换到视场角更大的超广角彩色摄像头捕捉图像。If the object to be photographed is only partially captured, but not completely captured, and thus cannot be fully displayed on the touch screen, it is necessary to expand the angle of view of the shooting when the position of the electronic device does not move, so the electronic device can Automatically switch to an ultra-wide-angle color camera with a larger field of view to capture images.
在另一种可能的实现方式中,在电子设备检测到用户用于指示变焦的第二操作之前,该方法还包括:电子设备根据当前用于捕捉图像的摄像头捕捉的第一图像生成第一构图。若当前用于捕捉图像的摄像头为广角彩色摄像头或长焦彩色摄像头,则电子设备还通过超广角彩色摄像头捕捉第二图像。电子设备根据第二图像生成第二构图。 若第一构图与第二构图不匹配,则电子设备提示用户是否切换摄像头。若检测到用户用于指示切换摄像头的操作,则电子设备根据第二图像和第二构图提示用户进行拍摄。In another possible implementation manner, before the electronic device detects the second operation for the user to instruct zooming, the method further includes: the electronic device generating the first composition according to the first image captured by the camera currently used to capture the image . If the camera currently used to capture the image is a wide-angle color camera or a telephoto color camera, the electronic device also captures the second image through the ultra-wide-angle color camera. The electronic device generates a second composition based on the second image. If the first composition does not match the second composition, the electronic device prompts the user whether to switch the camera. If an operation for instructing the user to switch the camera is detected, the electronic device prompts the user to shoot according to the second image and the second composition.
在该方案中,电子设备可以采用可捕捉的画面的视野范围最大的超广角彩色摄像头生成构图,并对第一构图进行验证。若第一构图与第二构图匹配,则表明第一构图合理,可以根据第一构图提示用户进行拍摄;若第二构图与第二构图匹配,则表明第一构图不合理,电子设备可以根据第二构图提示用户进行拍摄。In this solution, the electronic device may use the ultra-wide-angle color camera with the largest field of view of the captured screen to generate a composition, and verify the first composition. If the first composition matches the second composition, it indicates that the first composition is reasonable, and the user can be prompted to shoot according to the first composition; if the second composition matches the second composition, it indicates that the first composition is unreasonable, and the electronic device can The second composition prompts the user to shoot.
在另一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:若当前用于捕捉图像的摄像头为广角彩色摄像头或长焦彩色摄像头,且待拍摄对象为风景,则电子设备通过当前用于捕捉图像的摄像头和长广角彩色摄像头捕捉图像。电子设备将当前用于捕捉图像的摄像头捕捉到的图像和长广角彩色摄像头捕捉到的图像进行合成,电子设备在触摸屏上显示合成后的图像。In another possible implementation manner, the method further includes: if the camera currently used to capture the image is a wide-angle color camera or a telephoto color camera, and the object to be photographed is a landscape, then the electronic device The camera and long wide-angle color camera capture images. The electronic device synthesizes the image captured by the camera currently used to capture the image and the image captured by the long wide-angle color camera, and the electronic device displays the synthesized image on the touch screen.
也就是说,若待拍摄对象为风景,则电子设备可以在利用当前用于捕捉图像的摄像头进行图像捕捉的同时,还可以结合超广角彩色摄像头的视场角更广的特性,采集更大视野范围内的风景画面,从而帮助用户记录更加开阔的风景的画面。In other words, if the object to be photographed is a landscape, the electronic device can capture a larger field of view while using the current wide-angle color camera's wider field of view feature while capturing images using the camera currently used to capture the image Landscape pictures within the range, thus helping users record pictures of more open landscapes.
在另一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:在电子设备检测到用户用于指示录像的第三操作后,响应于第三操作显示录像模式下的拍摄界面。电子设备根据待拍摄对象在拍摄界面上的大小,或者根据待拍摄对象与电子设备的距离自动变焦,电子设备根据变焦结果自动切换用于捕捉图像的摄像头。In another possible implementation manner, the method further includes: after the electronic device detects the third operation used by the user to instruct recording, displaying the shooting interface in the recording mode in response to the third operation. The electronic device automatically zooms according to the size of the object to be photographed on the shooting interface, or according to the distance between the object to be photographed and the electronic device, and the electronic device automatically switches the camera used to capture the image according to the zoom result.
在该方案中,电子设备可以在录像过程中自动根据待拍摄对象进行实时变焦,并且实时切换用于捕捉图像的摄像头。In this solution, the electronic device can automatically zoom in real time according to the object to be photographed during the recording process, and switch the camera used to capture the image in real time.
在另一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:电子设备在拍摄界面上提示用户当前用于捕捉图像的摄像头、当前的变焦倍率或当前的拍摄模式。In another possible implementation manner, the method further includes: the electronic device prompts the user on the shooting interface of the camera currently used to capture the image, the current zoom magnification, or the current shooting mode.
从而,可以方便用户实时获知当前用于捕捉图像的摄像头和/或当前的变焦倍率。Therefore, it is convenient for the user to know the camera currently used to capture the image and / or the current zoom magnification in real time.
另一方面,本技术方案提供了一种图像捕捉方法,应用于具有触摸屏的电子设备,电子设备包括广角彩色摄像头、超广角彩色摄像头和长焦彩色摄像头。该方法包括:电子设备在检测到用户用于打开相机的第一操作后,响应于第一操作,在触摸屏上显示拍摄界面。电子设备利用广角彩色摄像头捕捉图像。电子设备在触摸屏上显示广角彩色摄像头捕捉到的图像。而后,若检测到用户用于指示超广角彩色摄像头的第二操作,则响应于第二操作,电子设备切换到超广角彩色摄像头捕捉图像。电子设备在触摸屏上显示超广角彩色摄像头捕捉到的图像。若检测到用户用于指示长焦彩色摄像头的第三操作,则响应于第三操作,电子设备切换到长焦彩色摄像头捕捉图像。电子设备在触摸屏上显示长焦彩色摄像头捕捉到的图像。On the other hand, the technical solution provides an image capturing method, which is applied to an electronic device with a touch screen. The electronic device includes a wide-angle color camera, an ultra-wide-angle color camera, and a telephoto color camera. The method includes: after detecting the first operation for opening the camera by the user, the electronic device displays a shooting interface on the touch screen in response to the first operation. Electronic devices use wide-angle color cameras to capture images. The electronic device displays the image captured by the wide-angle color camera on the touch screen. Then, if a second operation of the user for instructing the ultra-wide-angle color camera is detected, in response to the second operation, the electronic device switches to the ultra-wide-angle color camera to capture an image. The electronic device displays the image captured by the ultra-wide-angle color camera on the touch screen. If a third operation by the user for instructing the telephoto color camera is detected, in response to the third operation, the electronic device switches to the telephoto color camera to capture the image. The electronic device displays the image captured by the telephoto color camera on the touch screen.
这样,用户可以根据当前拍摄场景指示使用适用于当前拍摄场景的摄像头,电子设备可以根据用户的指示在广角彩色摄像头、超广角彩色摄像头和长焦彩色摄像头之间进行切换,从而利用能够适应于当前拍摄场景的摄像头进行图像捕捉和拍摄,获得较好的拍摄效果。In this way, the user can use the camera suitable for the current shooting scene according to the current shooting scene instruction, and the electronic device can switch between the wide-angle color camera, the ultra-wide-angle color camera, and the telephoto color camera according to the user's instruction, so that The camera that shoots the scene captures and shoots images to obtain better shooting results.
另一方面,本技术方案提供了一种图像捕捉方法,电子设备包括广角彩色摄像头、超广角彩色摄像头和长焦彩色摄像头。该方法包括:电子设备检测到用户用于打开相机的第一操作。电子设备响应于第一操作,在触摸屏上显示拍摄界面。若待拍摄对象 与电子设备的距离小于或者等于第一预设值,则电子设备通过超广角彩色摄像头捕捉图像。电子设备在触摸屏上显示超广角彩色摄像头捕捉到的图像。若待拍摄对象与电子设备的距离大于或者等于第二预设值,则电子设备通过长焦彩色摄像头捕捉图像,第二预设值大于第一预设值。电子设备在触摸屏上显示长焦彩色摄像头捕捉到的图像。若待拍摄对象与电子设备的距离大于第一预设值且小于第二预设值,则电子设备通过超广角彩色摄像头捕捉图像。电子设备在触摸屏上显示广角彩色摄像头捕捉到的图像。On the other hand, the technical solution provides an image capturing method. The electronic device includes a wide-angle color camera, an ultra-wide-angle color camera, and a telephoto color camera. The method includes: the electronic device detects a first operation by the user for turning on the camera. The electronic device displays the shooting interface on the touch screen in response to the first operation. If the distance between the object to be photographed and the electronic device is less than or equal to the first preset value, the electronic device captures the image through the ultra-wide-angle color camera. The electronic device displays the image captured by the ultra-wide-angle color camera on the touch screen. If the distance between the object to be photographed and the electronic device is greater than or equal to the second preset value, the electronic device captures the image through the telephoto color camera, and the second preset value is greater than the first preset value. The electronic device displays the image captured by the telephoto color camera on the touch screen. If the distance between the object to be photographed and the electronic device is greater than the first preset value and less than the second preset value, the electronic device captures the image through the ultra-wide-angle color camera. The electronic device displays the image captured by the wide-angle color camera on the touch screen.
这样,电子设备可以根据当前拍摄场景中待拍摄对象与电子设备之间的距离,自动在广角彩色摄像头、超广角彩色摄像头和长焦彩色摄像头之间进行切换,从而利用能够适应于当前拍摄场景的摄像头进行图像捕捉和拍摄,获得较好的拍摄效果。In this way, the electronic device can automatically switch between the wide-angle color camera, the ultra-wide-angle color camera, and the telephoto color camera according to the distance between the object to be photographed in the current shooting scene and the electronic device, thereby utilizing the The camera performs image capture and shooting to obtain better shooting results.
另一方面,本技术方案提供了一种图像捕捉方法,应用于具有触摸屏的电子设备。该电子设备包括广角彩色摄像头、超广角彩色摄像头和长焦彩色摄像头。该方法包括:电子设备检测到用户用于打开相机的第一操作。响应于第一操作,电子设备在触摸屏上显示拍摄界面。电子设备通过广角彩色摄像头捕捉图像,并在触摸屏上显示广角彩色摄像头捕捉到的图像。若当前用于捕捉图像的摄像头为广角彩色摄像头或长焦彩色摄像头,待拍摄对象与电子设备的距离小于或者等于第一预设值,则电子设备自动切换到通过超广角彩色摄像头捕捉图像。若当前用于捕捉图像的摄像头为广角彩色摄像头或超广角彩色摄像头,待拍摄对象与电子设备的距离大于或者等于第二预设值,则电子设备自动切换到通过长焦彩色摄像头捕捉图像,第二预设值大于第一预设值。若当前用于捕捉图像的摄像头为广角彩色摄像头或长焦彩色摄像头,且触摸屏上显示的捕捉到的图像包括待拍摄对象的一部分,则电子设备自动切换到通过超广角彩色摄像头捕捉图像。电子设备根据当前用于捕捉图像的摄像头捕捉的第一图像生成第一构图。若当前用于捕捉图像的摄像头为广角彩色摄像头或长焦彩色摄像头,则电子设备还通过超广角彩色摄像头捕捉第二图像。电子设备根据第二图像生成第二构图。若第一构图与第二构图不匹配,则电子设备提示用户是否切换摄像头。若检测到用户用于指示切换摄像头的操作,则电子设备根据第二图像和第二构图提示用户进行拍摄。电子设备检测到用户用于指示变焦的第二操作。响应于第二操作,电子设备确定变焦倍率K。若M≤K<1,则电子设备切换到通过超广角彩色摄像头捕捉图像;电子设备在触摸屏上显示超广角彩色摄像头捕捉到的图像。若K≥N,则电子设备切换到通过长焦彩色摄像头捕捉图像;电子设备在触摸屏上显示长焦彩色摄像头捕捉到的图像。若1≤K<N,则电子设备继续通过广角彩色摄像头捕捉图像。其中,M=tan(B/2)/tan(A/2),N=tan(B/2)/tan(C/2),A为超广角彩色摄像头的视场角,B为广角彩色摄像头的视场角,C为长焦彩色摄像头的视场角,且A大于B,B大于C。电子设备在触摸屏上显示超广角彩色摄像头或长焦彩色摄像头捕捉到的图像。电子设备检测到用户用于指示录像的第三操作。电子设备响应于第三操作显示录像模式下的拍摄界面。电子设备根据待拍摄对象在拍摄界面上的大小,或者根据待拍摄对象与电子设备的距离自动变焦。电子设备根据变焦结果自动切换用于捕捉图像的摄像头。On the other hand, the technical solution provides an image capturing method, which is applied to an electronic device with a touch screen. The electronic device includes a wide-angle color camera, an ultra-wide-angle color camera, and a telephoto color camera. The method includes: the electronic device detects a first operation by the user for turning on the camera. In response to the first operation, the electronic device displays the shooting interface on the touch screen. The electronic device captures the image through the wide-angle color camera, and displays the image captured by the wide-angle color camera on the touch screen. If the current camera for capturing images is a wide-angle color camera or a telephoto color camera, and the distance between the object to be photographed and the electronic device is less than or equal to the first preset value, the electronic device automatically switches to capturing the image through the ultra-wide-angle color camera. If the current camera for capturing images is a wide-angle color camera or an ultra-wide-angle color camera, and the distance between the object to be photographed and the electronic device is greater than or equal to the second preset value, the electronic device automatically switches to capturing the image through the telephoto color camera. The second preset value is greater than the first preset value. If the current camera for capturing images is a wide-angle color camera or a telephoto color camera, and the captured image displayed on the touch screen includes a part of the object to be photographed, the electronic device automatically switches to capturing the image through the ultra-wide-angle color camera. The electronic device generates the first composition according to the first image captured by the camera currently used to capture the image. If the camera currently used to capture the image is a wide-angle color camera or a telephoto color camera, the electronic device also captures the second image through the ultra-wide-angle color camera. The electronic device generates a second composition based on the second image. If the first composition does not match the second composition, the electronic device prompts the user whether to switch the camera. If an operation for instructing the user to switch the camera is detected, the electronic device prompts the user to shoot according to the second image and the second composition. The electronic device detects the second operation of the user to instruct zooming. In response to the second operation, the electronic device determines the zoom magnification K. If M≤K <1, the electronic device switches to capturing images through the ultra-wide-angle color camera; the electronic device displays the images captured by the ultra-wide-angle color camera on the touch screen. If K≥N, the electronic device switches to capturing the image through the telephoto color camera; the electronic device displays the image captured by the telephoto color camera on the touch screen. If 1≤K <N, the electronic device continues to capture images through the wide-angle color camera. Among them, M = tan (B / 2) / tan (A / 2), N = tan (B / 2) / tan (C / 2), A is the angle of view of the ultra-wide-angle color camera, and B is the wide-angle color camera The angle of view of C, C is the angle of view of the telephoto color camera, and A is greater than B, B is greater than C. The electronic device displays the image captured by the ultra-wide-angle color camera or the telephoto color camera on the touch screen. The electronic device detects a third operation that the user uses to instruct recording. The electronic device displays the shooting interface in the recording mode in response to the third operation. The electronic device automatically zooms according to the size of the object to be photographed on the shooting interface, or according to the distance between the object to be photographed and the electronic device. The electronic device automatically switches the camera used to capture the image according to the zoom result.
这样,电子设备可以根据用户的指示或根据当前拍摄场景,在广角彩色摄像头、超广角彩色摄像头和长焦彩色摄像头之间进行切换,从而利用能够适应于当前拍摄场景的摄像头进行图像捕捉和拍摄,获得较好的拍摄效果。In this way, the electronic device can switch between the wide-angle color camera, the ultra-wide-angle color camera and the telephoto color camera according to the user's instruction or according to the current shooting scene, so as to use the camera that can adapt to the current shooting scene for image capturing and shooting, Get better shooting results.
另一方面,本技术方案提供了一种捕捉图像的装置,该装置包含在电子设备中,该装置具有实现上述方面及上述方面的可能实现方式中电子设备行为的功能。功能可以通过硬件实现,也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的模块或单元。例如,检测模块或单元、显示模块或单元、处理模块或单元等。On the other hand, the present technical solution provides an apparatus for capturing an image, which is included in an electronic device, and the apparatus has a function of realizing the above aspect and the possible implementation manners of the above aspect. The function can be realized by hardware, and can also be realized by hardware executing corresponding software. The hardware or software includes one or more modules or units corresponding to the above functions. For example, a detection module or unit, a display module or unit, a processing module or unit, etc.
另一方面,本技术方案提供了一种电子设备,包括:触摸屏,其中,触摸屏包括触敏表面和显示器;广角彩色摄像头、超广角彩色摄像头和长焦彩色摄像头;一个或多个处理器;存储器;多个应用程序;以及一个或多个计算机程序。其中,一个或多个计算机程序被存储在存储器中,一个或多个计算机程序包括指令。当指令被电子设备执行时,使得电子设备执行上述方面及上述方面的各种可能的实现方式。On the other hand, the technical solution provides an electronic device, including: a touch screen, wherein the touch screen includes a touch-sensitive surface and a display; a wide-angle color camera, an ultra-wide-angle color camera, and a telephoto color camera; one or more processors; a memory ; Multiple applications; and one or more computer programs. Among them, one or more computer programs are stored in the memory, and the one or more computer programs include instructions. When the instruction is executed by the electronic device, the electronic device is caused to execute the above aspect and various possible implementation manners of the above aspect.
另一方面,本技术方案提供了一种电子设备,包括一个或多个处理器和一个或多个存储器。该一个或多个存储器与一个或多个处理器耦合,一个或多个存储器用于存储计算机程序代码,计算机程序代码包括计算机指令,当一个或多个处理器执行计算机指令时,使得电子设备执行上述任一方面任一项可能的实现中的图像捕捉方法。On the other hand, the technical solution provides an electronic device, including one or more processors and one or more memories. The one or more memories are coupled to one or more processors. The one or more memories are used to store computer program code. The computer program codes include computer instructions. When the one or more processors execute the computer instructions, the electronic device is executed. An image capture method in any possible implementation of any of the above aspects.
另一方面,本技术方案提供了一种计算机存储介质,包括计算机指令,当计算机指令在电子设备上运行时,使得电子设备执行上述任一方面任一项可能的实现中的图像捕捉方法。On the other hand, the present technical solution provides a computer storage medium, including computer instructions, which, when the computer instructions run on the electronic device, cause the electronic device to execute the image capturing method in any possible implementation of any of the above aspects.
另一方面,本技术方案提供了一种计算机程序产品,当计算机程序产品在电子设备上运行时,使得电子设备执行上述任一方面任一项可能的设计中的图像捕捉方法。On the other hand, the technical solution provides a computer program product that, when the computer program product runs on an electronic device, causes the electronic device to perform any image capture method in any possible design of any of the above aspects.
图1为本实施例提供的一种电子设备的硬件结构示意图;1 is a schematic diagram of a hardware structure of an electronic device provided by this embodiment;
图2为本实施例提供的几种摄像头的排列方式;2 is an arrangement of several cameras provided by this embodiment;
图3为本实施例提供的电子设备的软件结构示意图;3 is a schematic diagram of a software structure of an electronic device provided by this embodiment;
图4A-图4E为本实施例提供的电子设备的一组界面示意图;4A-4E are schematic diagrams of a set of interfaces of the electronic device provided by this embodiment;
图5A-图5F为本实施例提供的电子设备的另一组界面示意图;5A-5F are schematic diagrams of another set of interfaces of the electronic device provided by this embodiment;
图6A-图6B为本实施例提供的电子设备的另一组界面示意图;6A-6B are schematic diagrams of another set of interfaces of the electronic device provided by this embodiment;
图7A-图7B为本实施例提供的电子设备的另一组界面示意图;7A-7B are schematic diagrams of another set of interfaces of the electronic device provided by this embodiment;
图8为本实施例提供的摄像头采集到的图像与裁切部分的对应关系图;FIG. 8 is a diagram of the correspondence between the image collected by the camera provided by this embodiment and the cropped part;
图9A-图9B为本实施例提供的电子设备的另一组界面示意图;9A-9B are schematic diagrams of another set of interfaces of the electronic device provided by this embodiment;
图10A-图10B为本实施例提供的电子设备的另一组界面示意图;10A-10B are schematic diagrams of another set of interfaces of the electronic device provided by this embodiment;
图11A-图11B为本实施例提供的电子设备的另一组界面示意图;11A-11B are schematic diagrams of another set of interfaces of the electronic device provided by this embodiment;
图12为本实施例提供的电子设备的一种界面示意图;12 is a schematic diagram of an interface of an electronic device provided by this embodiment;
图13A-图13D为本实施例提供的电子设备的另一组界面示意图;13A-13D are schematic diagrams of another set of interfaces of the electronic device provided by this embodiment;
图14为本实施例提供的一种图像捕捉方法流程图;14 is a flowchart of an image capturing method provided by this embodiment;
图15为本实施例提供的另一种图像捕捉方法流程图;15 is a flowchart of another image capturing method provided by this embodiment;
图16为本实施例提供的电子设备的另一种结构示意图。FIG. 16 is another schematic structural diagram of an electronic device provided by this embodiment.
下面将结合本实施例中的附图,对本实施例中的技术方案进行描述。其中,在本实施例的描述中,除非另有说明,“/”表示或的意思,例如,A/B可以表示A或B;本 文中的“和/或”仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B这三种情况。另外,在本实施例的描述中,“多个”是指两个或多于两个。The technical solution in this embodiment will be described below with reference to the drawings in this embodiment. In the description of this embodiment, unless otherwise stated, “/” means or, for example, A / B may mean A or B; “and / or” in this text is merely a description of the related object The association relationship indicates that there may be three types of relationships, for example, A and / or B, which may indicate that there are three cases in which A exists alone, A and B exist simultaneously, and B exists alone. In addition, in the description of this embodiment, "plurality" means two or more than two.
以下,术语“第一”、“第二”仅用于描述目的,而不能理解为指示或暗示相对重要性或者隐含指明所指示的技术特征的数量。由此,限定有“第一”、“第二”的特征可以明示或者隐含地包括一个或者更多个该特征。在本实施例的描述中,除非另有说明,“多个”的含义是两个或两个以上。In the following, the terms "first" and "second" are used for description purposes only, and cannot be understood as indicating or implying relative importance or implicitly indicating the number of indicated technical features. Thus, the features defined as "first" and "second" may explicitly or implicitly include one or more of the features. In the description of this embodiment, unless otherwise stated, the meaning of "plurality" is two or more.
本实施例提供的图像捕捉方法可以应用于手机、平板电脑、照相机、可穿戴设备、车载设备、增强现实(augmented reality,AR)/虚拟现实(virtual reality,VR)设备、笔记本电脑、超级移动个人计算机(ultra-mobile personal computer,UMPC)、上网本、个人数字助理(personal digital assistant,PDA)等电子设备上,本实施例对电子设备的具体类型不作任何限制。The image capturing method provided in this embodiment can be applied to mobile phones, tablet computers, cameras, wearable devices, in-vehicle devices, augmented reality (augmented reality (AR) / virtual reality (VR) devices, notebook computers, and ultra-mobile individuals On electronic devices such as ultra-mobile personal computers (UMPCs), netbooks, personal digital assistants (PDAs), etc., this embodiment does not limit the specific types of electronic devices.
示例性的,图1示出了电子设备100的结构示意图。电子设备100可以包括处理器110,外部存储器接口120,内部存储器121,通用串行总线(universal serial bus,USB)接口130,充电管理模块130,电源管理模块141,电池142,天线1,天线2,移动通信模块150,无线通信模块160,音频模块170,扬声器170A,受话器170B,麦克风170C,耳机接口170D,传感器模块180,按键190,马达191,指示器192,摄像头193,显示屏194,以及用户标识模块(subscriber identification module,SIM)卡接口195等。其中传感器模块180可以包括压力传感器180A,陀螺仪传感器180B,气压传感器180C,磁传感器180D,加速度传感器180E,距离传感器180F,接近光传感器180G,指纹传感器180H,温度传感器180J,触摸传感器180K,环境光传感器180L,骨传导传感器180M等。Exemplarily, FIG. 1 shows a schematic structural diagram of an electronic device 100. The electronic device 100 may include a
可以理解的是,本实施例示意的结构并不构成对电子设备100的具体限定。在另一些实施例中,电子设备100可以包括比图示更多或更少的部件,或者组合某些部件,或者拆分某些部件,或者不同的部件布置。图示的部件可以以硬件,软件或软件和硬件的组合实现。It can be understood that the structure illustrated in this embodiment does not constitute a specific limitation on the electronic device 100. In other embodiments, the electronic device 100 may include more or fewer components than illustrated, or combine certain components, or split certain components, or arrange different components. The illustrated components can be implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of software and hardware.
处理器110可以包括一个或多个处理单元,例如:处理器110可以包括应用处理器(application processor,AP),调制解调处理器,图形处理器(graphics processing unit,GPU),图像信号处理器(image signal processor,ISP),控制器,存储器,视频编解码器,数字信号处理器(digital signal processor,DSP),基带处理器,和/或神经网络处理器(neural-network processing unit,NPU)等。其中,处理器110可以是一个或多个处理器;不同的处理单元可以是独立的器件,也可以集成在一个或多个处理器中。The
其中,控制器可以是电子设备100的神经中枢和指挥中心。控制器可以根据指令操作码和时序信号,产生操作控制信号,完成取指令和执行指令的控制。The controller may be the nerve center and command center of the electronic device 100. The controller can generate the operation control signal according to the instruction operation code and the timing signal to complete the control of fetching instructions and executing instructions.
处理器110中还可以设置存储器,用于存储指令和数据。在一些实施例中,处理器110中的存储器为高速缓冲存储器。该存储器可以保存处理器110刚用过或循环使用的指令或数据。如果处理器110需要再次使用该指令或数据,可从存储器中直接调用。避免了重复存取,减少了处理器110的等待时间,因而提高了系统的效率。The
在一些实施例中,处理器110可以包括一个或多个接口。接口可以包括集成电路 (inter-integrated circuit,I2C)接口,集成电路内置音频(inter-integrated circuit sound,I2S)接口,脉冲编码调制(pulse code modulation,PCM)接口,通用异步收发传输器(universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter,UART)接口,移动产业处理器接口(mobile industry processor interface,MIPI),通用输入输出(general-purpose input/output,GPIO)接口,用户标识模块(subscriber identity module,SIM)接口,和/或通用串行总线(universal serial bus,USB)接口等。In some embodiments, the
I2C接口是一种双向同步串行总线,包括一根串行数据线(serial data line,SDA)和一根串行时钟线(derail clock line,SCL)。在一些实施例中,处理器110可以包含多组I2C总线。处理器110可以通过不同的I2C总线接口分别耦合触摸传感器180K,充电器,闪光灯,摄像头193等。例如:处理器110可以通过I2C接口耦合触摸传感器180K,使处理器110与触摸传感器180K通过I2C总线接口通信,实现电子设备100的触摸功能。The I2C interface is a bidirectional synchronous serial bus, including a serial data line (serial data line, SDA) and a serial clock line (derail clock line, SCL). In some embodiments, the
I2S接口可以用于音频通信。在一些实施例中,处理器110可以包含多组I2S总线。处理器110可以通过I2S总线与音频模块170耦合,实现处理器110与音频模块170之间的通信。在一些实施例中,音频模块170可以通过I2S接口向无线通信模块160传递音频信号,实现通过蓝牙耳机接听电话的功能。The I2S interface can be used for audio communication. In some embodiments, the
PCM接口也可以用于音频通信,将模拟信号抽样,量化和编码。在一些实施例中,音频模块170与无线通信模块160可以通过PCM总线接口耦合。在一些实施例中,音频模块170也可以通过PCM接口向无线通信模块160传递音频信号,实现通过蓝牙耳机接听电话的功能。I2S接口和PCM接口都可以用于音频通信。The PCM interface can also be used for audio communication, sampling, quantizing and encoding analog signals. In some embodiments, the
UART接口是一种通用串行数据总线,用于异步通信。该总线可以为双向通信总线。它将要传输的数据在串行通信与并行通信之间转换。在一些实施例中,UART接口通常被用于连接处理器110与无线通信模块160。例如:处理器110通过UART接口与无线通信模块160中的蓝牙模块通信,实现蓝牙功能。在一些实施例中,音频模块170可以通过UART接口向无线通信模块160传递音频信号,实现通过蓝牙耳机播放音乐的功能。The UART interface is a universal serial data bus used for asynchronous communication. The bus may be a bidirectional communication bus. It converts the data to be transmitted between serial communication and parallel communication. In some embodiments, the UART interface is generally used to connect the
MIPI接口可以被用于连接处理器110与显示屏194,摄像头193等外围器件。MIPI接口包括摄像头串行接口(camera serial interface,CSI),显示屏串行接口(display serial interface,DSI)等。在一些实施例中,处理器110和摄像头193通过CSI接口通信,实现电子设备100的拍摄功能。处理器110和显示屏194通过DSI接口通信,实现电子设备100的显示功能。The MIPI interface can be used to connect the
GPIO接口可以通过软件配置。GPIO接口可以被配置为控制信号,也可被配置为数据信号。在一些实施例中,GPIO接口可以用于连接处理器110与摄像头193,显示屏194,无线通信模块160,音频模块170,传感器模块180等。GPIO接口还可以被配置为I2C接口,I2S接口,UART接口,MIPI接口等。The GPIO interface can be configured via software. The GPIO interface can be configured as a control signal or a data signal. In some embodiments, the GPIO interface may be used to connect the
USB接口130是符合USB标准规范的接口,具体可以是Mini USB接口,Micro USB接口,USB Type C接口等。USB接口130可以用于连接充电器为电子设备100充电,也可以用于电子设备100与外围设备之间传输数据。也可以用于连接耳机,通过耳机播放音频。该接口还可以用于连接其他电子设备,例如AR设备等。The USB interface 130 is an interface that conforms to the USB standard, and may specifically be a Mini USB interface, a Micro USB interface, a USB Type C interface, etc. The USB interface 130 can be used to connect a charger to charge the electronic device 100, and can also be used to transfer data between the electronic device 100 and peripheral devices. It can also be used to connect headphones and play audio through the headphones. The interface can also be used to connect other electronic devices, such as AR devices.
可以理解的是,本实施例示意的各模块间的接口连接关系,只是示意性说明,并不构成对电子设备100的结构限定。在本另一些实施例中,电子设备100也可以采用上述实施例中不同的接口连接方式,或多种接口连接方式的组合。It can be understood that the interface connection relationship between the modules illustrated in this embodiment is only a schematic description, and does not constitute a limitation on the structure of the electronic device 100. In some other embodiments, the electronic device 100 may also use different interface connection methods in the foregoing embodiments, or a combination of multiple interface connection methods.
充电管理模块130用于从充电器接收充电输入。其中,充电器可以是无线充电器,也可以是有线充电器。在一些有线充电的实施例中,充电管理模块130可以通过USB接口130接收有线充电器的充电输入。在一些无线充电的实施例中,充电管理模块130可以通过电子设备100的无线充电线圈接收无线充电输入。充电管理模块130为电池142充电的同时,还可以通过电源管理模块141为电子设备供电。The charging management module 130 is used to receive charging input from the charger. The charger can be a wireless charger or a wired charger. In some wired charging embodiments, the charging management module 130 may receive the charging input of the wired charger through the USB interface 130. In some wireless charging embodiments, the charging management module 130 may receive wireless charging input through the wireless charging coil of the electronic device 100. While the charging management module 130 charges the battery 142, it can also supply power to the electronic device through the power management module 141.
电源管理模块141用于连接电池142,充电管理模块130与处理器110。电源管理模块141接收电池142和/或充电管理模块130的输入,为处理器110,内部存储器121,外部存储器,显示屏194,摄像头193,和无线通信模块160等供电。电源管理模块141还可以用于监测电池容量,电池循环次数,电池健康状态(漏电,阻抗)等参数。在其他一些实施例中,电源管理模块141也可以设置于处理器110中。在另一些实施例中,电源管理模块141和充电管理模块130也可以设置于同一个器件中。The power management module 141 is used to connect the battery 142, the charging management module 130 and the
电子设备100的无线通信功能可以通过天线1,天线2,移动通信模块150,无线通信模块160,调制解调处理器以及基带处理器等实现。The wireless communication function of the electronic device 100 can be realized by the
天线1和天线2用于发射和接收电磁波信号。电子设备100中的每个天线可用于覆盖单个或多个通信频带。不同的天线还可以复用,以提高天线的利用率。例如:可以将天线1复用为无线局域网的分集天线。在另外一些实施例中,天线可以和调谐开关结合使用。
移动通信模块150可以提供应用在电子设备100上的包括2G/3G/4G/5G等无线通信的解决方案。移动通信模块150可以包括至少一个滤波器,开关,功率放大器,低噪声放大器(low noise amplifier,LNA)等。移动通信模块150可以由天线1接收电磁波,并对接收的电磁波进行滤波,放大等处理,传送至调制解调处理器进行解调。移动通信模块150还可以对经调制解调处理器调制后的信号放大,经天线1转为电磁波辐射出去。在一些实施例中,移动通信模块150的至少部分功能模块可以被设置于处理器110中。在一些实施例中,移动通信模块150的至少部分功能模块可以与处理器110的至少部分模块被设置在同一个器件中。The
调制解调处理器可以包括调制器和解调器。其中,调制器用于将待发送的低频基带信号调制成中高频信号。解调器用于将接收的电磁波信号解调为低频基带信号。随后解调器将解调得到的低频基带信号传送至基带处理器处理。低频基带信号经基带处理器处理后,被传递给应用处理器。应用处理器通过音频设备(不限于扬声器170A,受话器170B等)输出声音信号,或通过显示屏194显示图像或视频。在一些实施例中,调制解调处理器可以是独立的器件。在另一些实施例中,调制解调处理器可以独立于处理器110,与移动通信模块150或其他功能模块设置在同一个器件中。The modem processor may include a modulator and a demodulator. Among them, the modulator is used to modulate the low-frequency baseband signal to be transmitted into a high-frequency signal. The demodulator is used to demodulate the received electromagnetic wave signal into a low-frequency baseband signal. The demodulator then transmits the demodulated low-frequency baseband signal to the baseband processor for processing. The low-frequency baseband signal is processed by the baseband processor and then passed to the application processor. The application processor outputs a sound signal through an audio device (not limited to a speaker 170A, a
无线通信模块160可以提供应用在电子设备100上的包括无线局域网(wireless local area networks,WLAN)(如无线保真(wireless fidelity,Wi-Fi)网络),蓝牙(Bluetooth,BT),全球导航卫星系统(global navigation satellite system,GNSS),调频(frequency modulation,FM),近距离无线通信技术(near field communication,NFC),红外技术 (infrared,IR)等无线通信的解决方案。无线通信模块160可以是集成至少一个通信处理模块的一个或多个器件。无线通信模块160经由天线2接收电磁波,将电磁波信号调频以及滤波处理,将处理后的信号发送到处理器110。无线通信模块160还可以从处理器110接收待发送的信号,对其进行调频,放大,经天线2转为电磁波辐射出去。The wireless communication module 160 can provide wireless local area networks (wireless local area networks, WLAN) (such as wireless fidelity (Wi-Fi) networks), Bluetooth (Bluetooth, BT), and global navigation satellites that are applied to the electronic device 100 Wireless communication solutions such as global navigation (satellite system, GNSS), frequency modulation (FM), near field communication (NFC), infrared (IR), etc. The wireless communication module 160 may be one or more devices integrating at least one communication processing module. The wireless communication module 160 receives the electromagnetic wave via the antenna 2, frequency-modulates and filters the electromagnetic wave signal, and sends the processed signal to the
在一些实施例中,电子设备100的天线1和移动通信模块150耦合,天线2和无线通信模块160耦合,使得电子设备100可以通过无线通信技术与网络以及其他设备通信。无线通信技术可以包括全球移动通讯系统(global system for mobile communications,GSM),通用分组无线服务(general packet radio service,GPRS),码分多址接入(code division multiple access,CDMA),宽带码分多址(wideband code division multiple access,WCDMA),时分码分多址(time-division code division multiple access,TD-SCDMA),长期演进(long term evolution,LTE),BT,GNSS,WLAN,NFC,FM,和/或IR技术等。GNSS可以包括全球卫星定位系统(global positioning system,GPS),全球导航卫星系统(global navigation satellite system,GLONASS),北斗卫星导航系统(beidou navigation satellite system,BDS),准天顶卫星系统(quasi-zenith satellite system,QZSS)和/或星基增强系统(satellite based augmentation systems,SBAS)。In some embodiments, the
电子设备100通过GPU,显示屏194,以及应用处理器等实现显示功能。GPU为图像处理的微处理器,连接显示屏194和应用处理器。GPU用于执行数学和几何计算,用于图形渲染。处理器110可包括一个或多个GPU,其执行程序指令以生成或改变显示信息。The electronic device 100 realizes a display function through a GPU, a display screen 194, and an application processor. The GPU is a microprocessor for image processing, connecting the display screen 194 and the application processor. The GPU is used to perform mathematical and geometric calculations, and is used for graphics rendering. The
显示屏194用于显示图像,视频等。显示屏194包括显示面板。显示面板可以采用液晶显示屏(liquid crystal display,LCD),有机发光二极管(organic light-emitting diode,OLED),有源矩阵有机发光二极体或主动矩阵有机发光二极体(active-matrix organic light emitting diode的,AMOLED),柔性发光二极管(flex light-emitting diode,FLED),Miniled,MicroLed,Micro-oLed,量子点发光二极管(quantum dot light emitting diodes,QLED)等。在一些实施例中,电子设备100可以包括1个或N个显示屏194,N为大于1的正整数。The display screen 194 is used to display images, videos and the like. The display screen 194 includes a display panel. The display panel may use a liquid crystal display (LCD), an organic light-emitting diode (OLED), an active matrix organic light-emitting diode or an active matrix organic light-emitting diode (active-matrix organic light) emitting diode, AMOLED), flexible light-emitting diode (FLED), Miniled, MicroLed, Micro-oLed, quantum dot light emitting diode (QLED), etc. In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 may include 1 or N display screens 194, where N is a positive integer greater than 1.
电子设备100可以通过ISP,摄像头193,视频编解码器,GPU,显示屏194以及应用处理器等实现拍摄功能。The electronic device 100 can realize a shooting function through an ISP, a camera 193, a video codec, a GPU, a display screen 194, an application processor, and the like.
ISP用于处理摄像头193反馈的数据。例如,拍照时,打开快门,光线通过镜头被传递到摄像头感光元件上,光信号转换为电信号,摄像头感光元件将电信号传递给ISP处理,转化为肉眼可见的图像。ISP还可以对图像的噪点,亮度,肤色进行算法优化。ISP还可以对拍摄场景的曝光,色温等参数优化。在一些实施例中,ISP可以设置在摄像头193中。The ISP processes the data fed back by the camera 193. For example, when taking a picture, the shutter is opened, the light is transmitted to the camera photosensitive element through the lens, the optical signal is converted into an electrical signal, and the camera photosensitive element transmits the electrical signal to the ISP for processing, which is converted into a visible image. ISP can also optimize the algorithm of image noise, brightness and skin color. ISP can also optimize the exposure, color temperature and other parameters of the shooting scene. In some embodiments, the ISP may be set in the camera 193.
摄像头193用于捕获静态图像或视频。物体通过镜头生成光学图像投射到感光元件。感光元件可以是电荷耦合器件(charge coupled device,CCD)或互补金属氧化物半导体(complementary metal-oxide-semiconductor,CMOS)光电晶体管。感光元件把光信号转换成电信号,之后将电信号传递给ISP转换成数字图像信号。ISP将数字图像信号输出到DSP加工处理。DSP将数字图像信号转换成标准的RGB,YUV等格式的图像信号。在一些实施例中,电子设备100可以包括1个或N个摄像头193,N为大于 1的正整数。在本实施例中,N大于或者等于3,摄像头193具体可以包括超广角摄像头,广角摄像头和长焦摄像头。其中,广角摄像头可以为彩色摄像头,该超广角摄像头可以为彩色摄像头或黑白摄像头,该长焦摄像头可以为彩色摄像头或黑白摄像头。例如,摄像头193包括超广角彩色摄像头、广角彩色摄像头和长焦彩色摄像头。The camera 193 is used to capture still images or videos. The object generates an optical image through the lens and projects it onto the photosensitive element. The photosensitive element may be a charge coupled device (charge coupled device, CCD) or a complementary metal-oxide-semiconductor (CMOS) phototransistor. The photosensitive element converts the optical signal into an electrical signal, and then transmits the electrical signal to the ISP to convert it into a digital image signal. The ISP outputs the digital image signal to the DSP for processing. DSP converts digital image signals into standard RGB, YUV and other image signals. In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 may include 1 or N cameras 193, where N is a positive integer greater than 1. In this embodiment, N is greater than or equal to 3, and the camera 193 may specifically include an ultra-wide-angle camera, a wide-angle camera, and a telephoto camera. The wide-angle camera may be a color camera, the ultra-wide-angle camera may be a color camera or a black-and-white camera, and the telephoto camera may be a color camera or a black-and-white camera. For example, the camera 193 includes an ultra-wide-angle color camera, a wide-angle color camera, and a telephoto color camera.
当摄像头193包括多个(2个或两个以上)摄像头时,本实施例对各摄像头所处的位置不作限制。例如,各摄像头可以较为集中的设置于电子设备100上的某一位置,也可以分散在电子设备100上的不同位置。示例性的,当电子设备100包括超广角彩色摄像头201、广角彩色摄像头201和长焦彩色摄像头203时,图2给出了这三个摄像头之间的一些可能的排列方式。当然,在实际应用中,关于各个摄像头的位置不限于图2中列举的几种排列方式,可以根据实际情况而定。When the camera 193 includes a plurality of cameras (two or more than two), this embodiment does not limit the position of each camera. For example, each camera may be concentratedly arranged at a certain position on the electronic device 100, or may be distributed at different positions on the electronic device 100. Exemplarily, when the electronic device 100 includes an ultra-wide-
需要说明的是,为了使得电子设备100更加轻薄化,多个摄像头可以位于同一水平面上,即多个摄像头两两之间没有高度差。这样,可以避免电子设备100过厚,有助于提高用户体验。It should be noted that, in order to make the electronic device 100 thinner and thinner, multiple cameras may be located on the same horizontal plane, that is, there is no height difference between the multiple cameras. In this way, the electronic device 100 can be prevented from being too thick, which helps to improve the user experience.
数字信号处理器用于处理数字信号,除了可以处理数字图像信号,还可以处理其他数字信号。例如,当电子设备100在频点选择时,数字信号处理器用于对频点能量进行傅里叶变换等。The digital signal processor is used to process digital signals. In addition to digital image signals, it can also process other digital signals. For example, when the electronic device 100 is selected at a frequency point, the digital signal processor is used to perform Fourier transform on the energy at the frequency point.
视频编解码器用于对数字视频压缩或解压缩。电子设备100可以支持一种或多种视频编解码器。这样,电子设备100可以播放或录制多种编码格式的视频,例如:动态图像专家组(moving picture experts group,MPEG)1,MPEG2,MPEG3,MPEG4等。Video codec is used to compress or decompress digital video. The electronic device 100 may support one or more video codecs. In this way, the electronic device 100 can play or record videos in various encoding formats, for example: moving picture experts group (MPEG) 1, MPEG2, MPEG3, MPEG4, etc.
NPU为神经网络(neural-network,NN)计算处理器,通过借鉴生物神经网络结构,例如借鉴人脑神经元之间传递模式,对输入信息快速处理,还可以不断的自学习。通过NPU可以实现电子设备100的智能认知等应用,例如:图像识别,人脸识别,语音识别,文本理解等。NPU is a neural-network (NN) computing processor. By drawing on the structure of biological neural networks, such as the transfer mode between neurons in the human brain, the input information can be processed quickly, and it can also continuously learn by itself. The NPU can realize applications such as intelligent recognition of the electronic device 100, such as image recognition, face recognition, voice recognition, and text understanding.
外部存储器接口120可以用于连接外部存储卡,例如Micro SD卡,实现扩展电子设备100的存储能力。外部存储卡通过外部存储器接口120与处理器110通信,实现数据存储功能。例如将音乐,视频等文件保存在外部存储卡中。The
内部存储器121可以用于存储一个或多个计算机程序,该一个或多个计算机程序可以包括指令。处理器110通过运行存储在内部存储器121的指令,从而使得电子设备100执行各种功能应用以及数据处理。内部存储器121可以包括存储程序区和存储数据区。其中,存储程序区可存储操作系统,还可以存储一个或多个应用程序(比如相机、Facebook等)等。存储数据区可存储电子设备100使用过程中所创建的数据(比如照片,联系人等)等。此外,内部存储器121可以包括高速随机存取存储器,还可以包括非易失性存储器,例如至少一个磁盘存储器件,闪存器件,通用闪存存储器(universal flash storage,UFS)等。The internal memory 121 may be used to store one or more computer programs, which may include instructions. The
电子设备100可以通过音频模块170,扬声器170A,受话器170B,麦克风170C,耳机接口170D,以及应用处理器等实现音频功能。例如音乐播放,录音等。The electronic device 100 may implement audio functions through an
音频模块170用于将数字音频信息转换成模拟音频信号输出,也用于将模拟音频输入转换为数字音频信号。音频模块170还可以用于对音频信号编码和解码。在一些实施例中,音频模块170可以设置于处理器110中,或将音频模块170的部分功能模 块设置于处理器110中。The
扬声器170A,也称“喇叭”,用于将音频电信号转换为声音信号。电子设备100可以通过扬声器170A收听音乐,或收听免提通话。The speaker 170A, also called "speaker", is used to convert audio electrical signals into sound signals. The electronic device 100 can listen to music through the speaker 170A, or listen to a hands-free call.
受话器170B,也称“听筒”,用于将音频电信号转换成声音信号。当电子设备100接听电话或语音信息时,可以通过将受话器170B靠近人耳接听语音。The
麦克风170C,也称“话筒”,“传声器”,用于将声音信号转换为电信号。当拨打电话或发送语音信息时,用户可以通过人嘴靠近麦克风170C发声,将声音信号输入到麦克风170C。电子设备100可以设置至少一个麦克风170C。在另一些实施例中,电子设备100可以设置两个麦克风170C,除了采集声音信号,还可以实现降噪功能。在另一些实施例中,电子设备100还可以设置三个,四个或更多麦克风170C,实现采集声音信号,降噪,还可以识别声音来源,实现定向录音功能等。
耳机接口170D用于连接有线耳机。耳机接口170D可以是USB接口130,也可以是3.5mm的开放移动电子设备平台(open mobile terminal platform,OMTP)标准接口,美国蜂窝电信工业协会(cellular telecommunications industry association of the USA,CTIA)标准接口。The
压力传感器180A用于感受压力信号,可以将压力信号转换成电信号。在一些实施例中,压力传感器180A可以设置于显示屏194。压力传感器180A的种类很多,如电阻式压力传感器,电感式压力传感器,电容式压力传感器等。电容式压力传感器可以是包括至少两个具有导电材料的平行板。当有力作用于压力传感器180A,电极之间的电容改变。电子设备100根据电容的变化确定压力的强度。当有触摸操作作用于显示屏194,电子设备100根据压力传感器180A检测触摸操作强度。电子设备100也可以根据压力传感器180A的检测信号计算触摸的位置。在一些实施例中,作用于相同触摸位置,但不同触摸操作强度的触摸操作,可以对应不同的操作指令。例如:当有触摸操作强度小于第一压力阈值的触摸操作作用于短消息应用图标时,执行查看短消息的指令。当有触摸操作强度大于或等于第一压力阈值的触摸操作作用于短消息应用图标时,执行新建短消息的指令。The pressure sensor 180A is used to sense the pressure signal and can convert the pressure signal into an electrical signal. In some embodiments, the pressure sensor 180A may be provided on the display screen 194. There are many types of pressure sensors 180A, such as resistive pressure sensors, inductive pressure sensors, and capacitive pressure sensors. The capacitive pressure sensor may be a parallel plate including at least two conductive materials. When force is applied to the pressure sensor 180A, the capacitance between the electrodes changes. The electronic device 100 determines the intensity of the pressure according to the change in capacitance. When a touch operation is applied to the display screen 194, the electronic device 100 detects the intensity of the touch operation according to the pressure sensor 180A. The electronic device 100 may also calculate the touched position based on the detection signal of the pressure sensor 180A. In some embodiments, touch operations that act on the same touch position but have different touch operation intensities may correspond to different operation instructions. For example, when a touch operation with a touch operation intensity less than the first pressure threshold acts on the short message application icon, an instruction to view the short message is executed. When a touch operation with a touch operation intensity greater than or equal to the first pressure threshold acts on the short message application icon, an instruction to create a new short message is executed.
陀螺仪传感器180B可以用于确定电子设备100的运动姿态。在一些实施例中,可以通过陀螺仪传感器180B确定电子设备100围绕三个轴(即,x,y和z轴)的角速度。陀螺仪传感器180B可以用于拍摄防抖。示例性的,当按下快门,陀螺仪传感器180B检测电子设备100抖动的角度,根据角度计算出镜头模组需要补偿的距离,让镜头通过反向运动抵消电子设备100的抖动,实现防抖。陀螺仪传感器180B还可以用于导航,体感游戏场景。The gyro sensor 180B may be used to determine the movement posture of the electronic device 100. In some embodiments, the angular velocity of the electronic device 100 around three axes (ie, x, y, and z axes) may be determined by the gyro sensor 180B. The gyro sensor 180B can be used for shooting anti-shake. Exemplarily, when the shutter is pressed, the gyro sensor 180B detects the shaking angle of the electronic device 100, calculates the distance that the lens module needs to compensate based on the angle, and allows the lens to counteract the shaking of the electronic device 100 through reverse movement to achieve anti-shake. The gyro sensor 180B can also be used for navigation and somatosensory game scenes.
气压传感器180C用于测量气压。在一些实施例中,电子设备100通过气压传感器180C测得的气压值计算海拔高度,辅助定位和导航。The air pressure sensor 180C is used to measure air pressure. In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 calculates the altitude by using the air pressure value measured by the air pressure sensor 180C to assist positioning and navigation.
磁传感器180D包括霍尔传感器。电子设备100可以利用磁传感器180D检测翻盖皮套的开合。在一些实施例中,当电子设备100是翻盖机时,电子设备100可以根据磁传感器180D检测翻盖的开合。进而根据检测到的皮套的开合状态或翻盖的开合状态,设置翻盖自动解锁等特性。The magnetic sensor 180D includes a Hall sensor. The electronic device 100 can detect the opening and closing of the flip holster using the magnetic sensor 180D. In some embodiments, when the electronic device 100 is a clamshell machine, the electronic device 100 may detect the opening and closing of the clamshell according to the magnetic sensor 180D. Furthermore, according to the detected opening and closing state of the holster or the opening and closing state of the flip cover, characteristics such as automatic unlocking of the flip cover are set.
加速度传感器180E可检测电子设备100在各个方向上(一般为三轴)加速度的大小。 当电子设备100静止时可检测出重力的大小及方向。还可以用于识别电子设备姿态,应用于横竖屏切换,计步器等应用。The acceleration sensor 180E can detect the magnitude of acceleration of the electronic device 100 in various directions (generally three axes). When the electronic device 100 is stationary, the magnitude and direction of gravity can be detected. It can also be used to recognize the posture of electronic devices, and be used in applications such as horizontal and vertical screen switching and pedometers.
距离传感器180F,用于测量距离。电子设备100可以通过红外或激光测量距离。在一些实施例中,拍摄场景,电子设备100可以利用距离传感器180F测距以实现快速对焦。The distance sensor 180F is used to measure the distance. The electronic device 100 can measure the distance by infrared or laser. In some embodiments, when shooting scenes, the electronic device 100 may use the distance sensor 180F to measure distance to achieve fast focusing.
接近光传感器180G可以包括例如发光二极管(LED)和光检测器,例如光电二极管。发光二极管可以是红外发光二极管。电子设备100通过发光二极管向外发射红外光。电子设备100使用光电二极管检测来自附近物体的红外反射光。当检测到充分的反射光时,可以确定电子设备100附近有物体。当检测到不充分的反射光时,电子设备100可以确定电子设备100附近没有物体。电子设备100可以利用接近光传感器180G检测用户手持电子设备100贴近耳朵通话,以便自动熄灭屏幕达到省电的目的。接近光传感器180G也可用于皮套模式,口袋模式自动解锁与锁屏。The proximity light sensor 180G may include, for example, a light emitting diode (LED) and a light detector, such as a photodiode. The light emitting diode may be an infrared light emitting diode. The electronic device 100 emits infrared light outward through the light emitting diode. The electronic device 100 uses a photodiode to detect infrared reflected light from nearby objects. When sufficient reflected light is detected, it may be determined that there is an object near the electronic device 100. When insufficient reflected light is detected, the electronic device 100 may determine that there is no object near the electronic device 100. The electronic device 100 can use the proximity light sensor 180G to detect that the user holds the electronic device 100 close to the ear to talk, so as to automatically turn off the screen to save power. The proximity light sensor 180G can also be used in leather case mode, pocket mode automatically unlocks and locks the screen.
环境光传感器180L用于感知环境光亮度。电子设备100可以根据感知的环境光亮度自适应调节显示屏194亮度。环境光传感器180L也可用于拍照时自动调节白平衡。环境光传感器180L还可以与接近光传感器180G配合,检测电子设备100是否在口袋里,以防误触。The ambient light sensor 180L is used to sense the brightness of ambient light. The electronic device 100 can adaptively adjust the brightness of the display screen 194 according to the perceived brightness of the ambient light. The ambient light sensor 180L can also be used to automatically adjust the white balance when taking pictures. The ambient light sensor 180L can also cooperate with the proximity light sensor 180G to detect whether the electronic device 100 is in a pocket to prevent accidental touch.
指纹传感器180H用于采集指纹。电子设备100可以利用采集的指纹特性实现指纹解锁,访问应用锁,指纹拍照,指纹接听来电等。The fingerprint sensor 180H is used to collect fingerprints. The electronic device 100 can use the collected fingerprint characteristics to realize fingerprint unlocking, access to application locks, fingerprint taking pictures, fingerprint answering calls, and the like.
温度传感器180J用于检测温度。在一些实施例中,电子设备100利用温度传感器180J检测的温度,执行温度处理策略。例如,当温度传感器180J上报的温度超过阈值,电子设备100执行降低位于温度传感器180J附近的处理器的性能,以便降低功耗实施热保护。在另一些实施例中,当温度低于另一阈值时,电子设备100对电池142加热,以避免低温导致电子设备100异常关机。在其他一些实施例中,当温度低于又一阈值时,电子设备100对电池142的输出电压执行升压,以避免低温导致的异常关机。The temperature sensor 180J is used to detect the temperature. In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 uses the temperature detected by the temperature sensor 180J to execute a temperature processing strategy. For example, when the temperature reported by the temperature sensor 180J exceeds a threshold, the electronic device 100 performs performance reduction of the processor located near the temperature sensor 180J in order to reduce power consumption and implement thermal protection. In other embodiments, when the temperature is lower than another threshold, the electronic device 100 heats the battery 142 to avoid abnormal shutdown of the electronic device 100 due to low temperature. In some other embodiments, when the temperature is below another threshold, the electronic device 100 performs boosting on the output voltage of the battery 142 to avoid abnormal shutdown due to low temperature.
触摸传感器180K,也可称为触控面板或触敏表面。触摸传感器180K可以设置于显示屏194,由触摸传感器180K与显示屏194组成触摸屏,也称“触控屏”。触摸传感器180K用于检测作用于其上或附近的触摸操作。触摸传感器可以将检测到的触摸操作传递给应用处理器,以确定触摸事件类型。可以通过显示屏194提供与触摸操作相关的视觉输出。在另一些实施例中,触摸传感器180K也可以设置于电子设备100的表面,与显示屏194所处的位置不同。The touch sensor 180K may also be called a touch panel or a touch-sensitive surface. The touch sensor 180K may be provided on the display screen 194, and the touch sensor 180K and the display screen 194 constitute a touch screen, also called a "touch screen". The touch sensor 180K is used to detect a touch operation acting on or near it. The touch sensor can pass the detected touch operation to the application processor to determine the type of touch event. The visual output related to the touch operation can be provided through the display screen 194. In other embodiments, the touch sensor 180K may also be disposed on the surface of the electronic device 100, which is different from the location where the display screen 194 is located.
骨传导传感器180M可以获取振动信号。在一些实施例中,骨传导传感器180M可以获取人体声部振动骨块的振动信号。骨传导传感器180M也可以接触人体脉搏,接收血压跳动信号。在一些实施例中,骨传导传感器180M也可以设置于耳机中,结合成骨传导耳机。音频模块170可以基于骨传导传感器180M获取的声部振动骨块的振动信号,解析出语音信号,实现语音功能。应用处理器可以基于骨传导传感器180M获取的血压跳动信号解析心率信息,实现心率检测功能。The bone conduction sensor 180M can acquire vibration signals. In some embodiments, the bone conduction sensor 180M can acquire the vibration signal of the vibrating bone mass of the human body part. The bone conduction sensor 180M can also contact the pulse of the human body and receive a blood pressure beating signal. In some embodiments, the bone conduction sensor 180M may also be provided in the earphone and combined into a bone conduction earphone. The
按键190包括开机键,音量键等。按键190可以是机械按键。也可以是触摸式按键。电子设备100可以接收按键输入,产生与电子设备100的用户设置以及功能控制有关的键信号输入。The key 190 includes a power-on key, a volume key, and the like. The key 190 may be a mechanical key. It can also be a touch button. The electronic device 100 can receive key input and generate key signal input related to user settings and function control of the electronic device 100.
马达191可以产生振动提示。马达191可以用于来电振动提示,也可以用于触摸振动反馈。例如,作用于不同应用(例如拍照,音频播放等)的触摸操作,可以对应不同的振动反馈效果。作用于显示屏194不同区域的触摸操作,马达191也可对应不同的振动反馈效果。不同的应用场景(例如:时间提醒,接收信息,闹钟,游戏等)也可以对应不同的振动反馈效果。触摸振动反馈效果还可以支持自定义。The motor 191 may generate a vibration prompt. The motor 191 can be used for vibration notification of incoming calls and can also be used for touch vibration feedback. For example, touch operations applied to different applications (such as taking pictures, playing audio, etc.) may correspond to different vibration feedback effects. For the touch operation in different areas of the display screen 194, the motor 191 can also correspond to different vibration feedback effects. Different application scenarios (for example: time reminder, receiving information, alarm clock, game, etc.) can also correspond to different vibration feedback effects. Touch vibration feedback effect can also support customization.
指示器192可以是指示灯,可以用于指示充电状态,电量变化,也可以用于指示消息,未接来电,通知等。The indicator 192 may be an indicator light, which may be used to indicate a charging state, a power change, and may also be used to indicate a message, a missed call, a notification, and the like.
SIM卡接口195用于连接SIM卡。SIM卡可以通过插入SIM卡接口195,或从SIM卡接口195拔出,实现和电子设备100的接触和分离。电子设备100可以支持1个或N个SIM卡接口,N为大于1的正整数。SIM卡接口195可以支持Nano SIM卡,Micro SIM卡,SIM卡等。同一个SIM卡接口195可以同时插入多张卡。多张卡的类型可以相同,也可以不同。SIM卡接口195也可以兼容不同类型的SIM卡。SIM卡接口195也可以兼容外部存储卡。电子设备100通过SIM卡和网络交互,实现通话以及数据通信等功能。在一些实施例中,电子设备100采用eSIM,即:嵌入式SIM卡。eSIM卡可以嵌在电子设备100中,不能和电子设备100分离。The
电子设备100的软件系统可以采用分层架构,事件驱动架构,微核架构,微服务架构,或云架构。本实施例以分层架构的Android系统为例,示例性说明电子设备100的软件结构。The software system of the electronic device 100 may adopt a layered architecture, event-driven architecture, micro-core architecture, micro-service architecture, or cloud architecture. This embodiment takes a layered architecture Android system as an example to exemplarily explain the software structure of the electronic device 100.
图3是本实施例的电子设备100的软件结构框图。分层架构将软件分成若干个层,每一层都有清晰的角色和分工。层与层之间通过软件接口通信。在一些实施例中,将Android系统分为四层,从上至下分别为应用程序层,应用程序框架层,安卓运行时(Android runtime)和系统库,以及内核层。应用程序层可以包括一系列应用程序包。FIG. 3 is a block diagram of the software structure of the electronic device 100 of this embodiment. The layered architecture divides the software into several layers, and each layer has a clear role and division of labor. The layers communicate with each other through a software interface. In some embodiments, the Android system is divided into four layers, from top to bottom are the application layer, the application framework layer, the Android runtime and the system library, and the kernel layer. The application layer may include a series of application packages.
如图3所示,应用程序包可以包括相机,图库,日历,通话,地图,导航,WLAN,蓝牙,音乐,视频,短信息等应用程序。As shown in FIG. 3, the application package may include applications such as camera, gallery, calendar, call, map, navigation, WLAN, Bluetooth, music, video, and short message.
应用程序框架层为应用程序层的应用程序提供应用编程接口(application programming interface,API)和编程框架。应用程序框架层包括一些预先定义的函数。The application framework layer provides an application programming interface (application programming interface) and programming framework for applications at the application layer. The application framework layer includes some predefined functions.
如图3所示,应用程序框架层可以包括窗口管理器,内容提供器,视图系统,电话管理器,资源管理器,通知管理器等。As shown in FIG. 3, the application framework layer may include a window manager, a content provider, a view system, a phone manager, a resource manager, a notification manager, and so on.
窗口管理器用于管理窗口程序。窗口管理器可以获取显示屏大小,判断是否有状态栏,锁定屏幕,截取屏幕等。The window manager is used to manage window programs. The window manager can obtain the size of the display screen, determine whether there is a status bar, lock the screen, intercept the screen, etc.
内容提供器用来存放和获取数据,并使这些数据可以被应用程序访问。数据可以包括视频,图像,音频,拨打和接听的电话,浏览历史和书签,电话簿等。Content providers are used to store and retrieve data and make it accessible to applications. Data can include videos, images, audio, calls made and received, browsing history and bookmarks, phone book, etc.
视图系统包括可视控件,例如显示文字的控件,显示图片的控件等。视图系统可用于构建应用程序。显示界面可以由一个或多个视图组成的。例如,包括短信通知图标的显示界面,可以包括显示文字的视图以及显示图片的视图。The view system includes visual controls, such as controls for displaying text and controls for displaying pictures. The view system can be used to build applications. The display interface can be composed of one or more views. For example, a display interface including an SMS notification icon may include a view that displays text and a view that displays pictures.
电话管理器用于提供电子设备100的通信功能。例如通话状态的管理(包括接通,挂断等)。The phone manager is used to provide the communication function of the electronic device 100. For example, the management of the call state (including connection, hang up, etc.).
资源管理器为应用程序提供各种资源,比如本地化字符串,图标,图片,布局文件,视频文件等等。The resource manager provides various resources for the application, such as localized strings, icons, pictures, layout files, video files, and so on.
通知管理器使应用程序可以在状态栏中显示通知信息,可以用于传达告知类型的消息,可以短暂停留后自动消失,无需用户交互。比如通知管理器被用于告知下载完成,消息提醒等。通知管理器还可以是以图表或者滚动条文本形式出现在系统顶部状态栏的通知,例如后台运行的应用程序的通知,还可以是以对话窗口形式出现在屏幕上的通知。例如在状态栏提示文本信息,发出提示音,电子设备振动,指示灯闪烁等。The notification manager enables applications to display notification information in the status bar, which can be used to convey notification-type messages, and can disappear after a short stay without user interaction. For example, the notification manager is used to notify the completion of downloading, message reminders, etc. The notification manager can also be a notification that appears in the status bar at the top of the system in the form of a chart or scroll bar text, such as a notification of an application running in the background, or a notification that appears on the screen in the form of a dialog window. For example, the text message is displayed in the status bar, a prompt sound is emitted, the electronic device vibrates, and the indicator light flashes.
Android Runtime包括核心库和虚拟机。Android runtime负责安卓系统的调度和管理。Android Runtime includes core library and virtual machine. Android runtime is responsible for the scheduling and management of the Android system.
核心库包含两部分:一部分是java语言需要调用的功能函数,另一部分是安卓的核心库。The core library contains two parts: one part is the function function that Java language needs to call, and the other part is the core library of Android.
应用程序层和应用程序框架层运行在虚拟机中。虚拟机将应用程序层和应用程序框架层的java文件执行为二进制文件。虚拟机用于执行对象生命周期的管理,堆栈管理,线程管理,安全和异常的管理,以及垃圾回收等功能。The application layer and the application framework layer run in the virtual machine. The virtual machine executes the java files of the application layer and the application framework layer into binary files. The virtual machine is used to perform functions such as object lifecycle management, stack management, thread management, security and exception management, and garbage collection.
系统库可以包括多个功能模块。例如:表面管理器(surface manager),媒体库(Media Libraries),三维图形处理库(例如:OpenGL ES),2D图形引擎(例如:SGL)等。The system library may include multiple functional modules. For example: surface manager (surface manager), media library (Media library), 3D graphics processing library (for example: OpenGL ES), 2D graphics engine (for example: SGL), etc.
表面管理器用于对显示子系统进行管理,并且为多个应用程序提供了2D和3D图层的融合。The surface manager is used to manage the display subsystem and provides the fusion of 2D and 3D layers for multiple applications.
媒体库支持多种常用的音频,视频格式回放和录制,以及静态图像文件等。媒体库可以支持多种音视频编码格式,例如:MPEG4,H.264,MP3,AAC,AMR,JPG,PNG等。The media library supports a variety of commonly used audio, video format playback and recording, and still image files. The media library can support multiple audio and video encoding formats, such as: MPEG4, H.264, MP3, AAC, AMR, JPG, PNG, etc.
三维图形处理库用于实现三维图形绘图,图像渲染,合成,和图层处理等。The 3D graphics processing library is used to realize 3D graphics drawing, image rendering, synthesis, and layer processing.
2D图形引擎是2D绘图的绘图引擎。The 2D graphics engine is a drawing engine for 2D drawing.
内核层是硬件和软件之间的层。内核层至少包含显示驱动,摄像头驱动,音频驱动,传感器驱动。The kernel layer is the layer between hardware and software. The kernel layer contains at least the display driver, camera driver, audio driver, and sensor driver.
下面结合捕获拍照场景,示例性说明电子设备100软件以及硬件的工作流程。In the following, the workflow of the software and hardware of the electronic device 100 will be exemplarily described in conjunction with capturing a photographing scene.
当触摸传感器180K接收到触摸操作,相应的硬件中断被发给内核层。内核层将触摸操作加工成原始输入事件(包括触摸坐标,触摸操作的时间戳等信息)。原始输入事件被存储在内核层。应用程序框架层从内核层获取原始输入事件,识别该输入事件所对应的控件。以该触摸操作是触摸单击操作,该单击操作所对应的控件为相机应用图标的控件为例,相机应用调用应用框架层的接口,启动相机应用,确定需要使用的一个或多个摄像头193,进而通过调用内核层启动需要使用的一个或多个摄像头193的驱动,通过一个或多个摄像头193捕获静态图像或视频。When the touch sensor 180K receives the touch operation, the corresponding hardware interrupt is sent to the kernel layer. The kernel layer processes touch operations into original input events (including touch coordinates, time stamps and other information of touch operations). The original input events are stored in the kernel layer. The application framework layer obtains the original input event from the kernel layer and identifies the control corresponding to the input event. Taking the touch operation as a touch click operation, and the control corresponding to the click operation is a control of the camera application icon as an example, the camera application calls an interface of the application framework layer, starts the camera application, and determines one or more cameras 193 to be used Then, the driver of the one or more cameras 193 to be used is started by calling the kernel layer, and the still image or video is captured by the one or more cameras 193.
具体的,电子设备100可以通过摄像头进行对焦,根据摄像头捕获的信息进行图像预览,在接收到用户指示“拍摄”的操作后,电子设备100可以根据摄像头捕获的信息生成拍摄获得的图像。Specifically, the electronic device 100 can focus through the camera and preview the image based on the information captured by the camera. After receiving the user's instruction to "shoot", the electronic device 100 can generate the captured image according to the information captured by the camera.
当电子设备100包括三个或三个以上的摄像头时,在不同拍摄场景下,电子设备100可以从这三个摄像头中选择适合当前拍摄场景的摄像头进行拍摄,以在当前拍摄场景下获得较好的拍摄效果。与现有技术在任何拍摄场景下,均通过电子设备所具有的两个摄像头获取的图像进行简单融合,来得到拍摄获得的图像相比,本实施例提供的方法可以在多样、多变的拍摄场景下,采用适合当前拍摄场景的摄像头获取的图像 来生成拍摄获得的图像,因而能够在各拍摄场景下均获得质量较高的拍摄图像。另外,当电子设备100包括上述三个摄像头时,电子设备100可以在不同摄像头之间进行切换,不同摄像头可以适用于不同的拍摄场景,因而电子设备100适用的拍摄场景更多,电子设备的功能更为强大和多样。When the electronic device 100 includes three or more cameras, in different shooting scenes, the electronic device 100 can select a camera suitable for the current shooting scene from the three cameras to shoot, in order to obtain better in the current shooting scene Shooting effect. Compared with the prior art, in any shooting scene, the images obtained by the two cameras of the electronic device are simply fused to obtain the captured images. The method provided in this embodiment can be used in various and variable shooting In the scene, the image obtained by the camera suitable for the current shooting scene is used to generate the image obtained by shooting, so that a high-quality shot image can be obtained in each shooting scene. In addition, when the electronic device 100 includes the above three cameras, the electronic device 100 can switch between different cameras, and different cameras can be applied to different shooting scenes, so the electronic device 100 is suitable for more shooting scenes, and the functions of the electronic device More powerful and diverse.
以下将以具有图1和图3所示结构的手机为电子设备100,以电子设备100包括超广角彩色摄像头、广角彩色摄像头和长焦彩色摄像头为例,对本实施例提供的技术方案进行具体阐述。In the following, the mobile phone having the structure shown in FIG. 1 and FIG. 3 will be used as the electronic device 100. Taking the electronic device 100 including an ultra-wide-angle color camera, a wide-angle color camera, and a telephoto color camera as examples, the technical solution provided in this embodiment will be specifically described. .
为方便描述,以下将广角彩色摄像头称为第一摄像头,将超广角彩色摄像头称为第二摄像头,将长焦彩色摄像头称为第三摄像头。For convenience of description, the wide-angle color camera is referred to as a first camera, the ultra-wide-angle color camera is referred to as a second camera, and the telephoto color camera is referred to as a third camera.
不同摄像头的像素和分辨率可以相同也可以不同。例如,在这三个摄像头中,第一摄像头可以具有最高的像素和分辨率。The pixels and resolutions of different cameras can be the same or different. For example, among the three cameras, the first camera may have the highest pixel and resolution.
这三个摄像头中,第二摄像头具有最大的视场角,可拍摄的视野范围最大。第一摄像头的视场角小于第二摄像头的视场角且大于第三摄像头的视场角,即第一摄像头的视场角小于第二摄像头但大于第三摄像头,可以用于拍摄较大的视野范围内的景物;并且,与其他两个摄像头相比,第一摄像头具有最佳的成像质量(或画面质量)。第三摄像头的视场角小于第二摄像头和第一摄像头,但第三摄像头的焦距大于第二摄像头和第一摄像头,适于捕捉远景信息,拍摄远处的景物。Among these three cameras, the second camera has the largest angle of view and the largest field of view possible. The field of view of the first camera is smaller than the field of view of the second camera and larger than the field of view of the third camera, that is, the field of view of the first camera is smaller than the second camera but larger than the third camera, which can be used to shoot larger Scenery within the field of view; and, compared with the other two cameras, the first camera has the best imaging quality (or picture quality). The field of view of the third camera is smaller than that of the second camera and the first camera, but the focal length of the third camera is larger than that of the second camera and the first camera, and is suitable for capturing distant information and shooting distant objects.
其中,视场角用于指示手机在拍摄图像的过程中,摄像头所能拍摄到的最大的角度范围,该角度范围内的景物可以被摄像头捕获到。若待拍摄对象处于这个角度范围内,该待拍摄对象便会被手机采集到。若待拍摄对象处于这个角度范围之外,该被拍摄设备便不会被手机采集到。通常,手机的视场角越大,则拍摄范围就越大,焦距就越短。而手机的视场角越小,则拍摄范围就越小,焦距就越长。可以理解的是,“视场角”也可以替换为“视场范围”、“视野范围”、“视野区域”、“成像范围”或“成像视野”等词汇。也就是说,本文对于“视场角”的名称不作限制,只要表达的是如上概念即可。可以理解的是,“视场角”只是本实施例中所使用的一个词语,其代表的含义在本实施例中已经记载,其名称并不能对本实施例构成任何限制;另外,在其他一些实施例中,“视场角”也可以被称为例如“视场范围”、“视野范围”、“视野区域”、“成像范围”或“成像视野”等其他名字。Among them, the field of view angle is used to indicate the maximum angle range that the camera can shoot during the process of capturing an image on the mobile phone, and the scene within the angle range can be captured by the camera. If the object to be photographed is within this angle range, the object to be photographed will be collected by the mobile phone. If the object to be photographed is outside this angle range, the photographed device will not be collected by the mobile phone. Generally, the larger the field of view of the mobile phone, the larger the shooting range and the shorter the focal length. The smaller the field of view of the mobile phone, the smaller the shooting range and the longer the focal length. It can be understood that the “angle of view” can also be replaced with words such as “field of view range”, “field of view range”, “field of view area”, “imaging range” or “imaging field of view”. In other words, this article does not limit the name of the "angle of view", as long as the above concept is expressed. It can be understood that “angle of view” is just a word used in this embodiment, the meaning of its representative has been recorded in this embodiment, and its name does not constitute any limitation to this embodiment; in addition, in some other implementations For example, "angle of view" may also be referred to as other names such as "field of view range", "field of view range", "field of view area", "imaging range" or "imaging field of view".
在一些实施例中,第一摄像头的解像力最强。解像力可以理解为分辨被摄原物细节的能力。举例来说,若被摄原物是张纸,布满了很多线条,解像力较强的手机拍出来的图像可以辨认出100条线条,而解像力较弱的手机拍出来的图像只能辨认10条线条。手机的解像力越大,那么该手机捕捉待拍摄对象的图像之后,还原该待拍摄对象的细节的能力越强,例如用户想要放大捕获到的图像,那么放大后的图像的清晰度较高。通常,解像力和像素、分辨率等具有一定的关联,像素或者分辨率越高的手机解像力越强。成像质量或画面质量可以包括清晰度、锐度、解析度、色域范围、色彩纯度、色彩平衡等方面。In some embodiments, the first camera has the strongest resolution. Resolution can be understood as the ability to distinguish the details of the original object. For example, if the object being photographed is a piece of paper covered with many lines, an image captured by a mobile phone with strong resolution can recognize 100 lines, while an image captured by a mobile phone with weak resolution can only recognize 10 lines. line. The greater the resolution of the mobile phone, the stronger the ability of the mobile phone to restore the details of the object to be captured after capturing the image of the object to be captured. For example, if the user wants to enlarge the captured image, the sharpness of the enlarged image is higher. Generally, the resolution has a certain relationship with pixels, resolution, etc., the higher the resolution of the pixel or the higher the resolution of the mobile phone. Imaging quality or picture quality may include such aspects as sharpness, sharpness, resolution, color gamut range, color purity, color balance, and so on.
在一些实施例中,由于第一摄像头的成像质量高于其他两个摄像头,且第一摄像头的视场角居中,可以捕获较大的视野范围,第一摄像头的解像力强等原因,第一摄像头的综合能力较强,因而第一摄像头可以作为主摄像头使用,其他两个摄像头可以 作为辅助摄像头使用。In some embodiments, since the imaging quality of the first camera is higher than that of the other two cameras, and the field of view angle of the first camera is centered, a larger field of view can be captured, and the resolution of the first camera is strong. The comprehensive ability of the camera is strong, so the first camera can be used as the main camera, and the other two cameras can be used as auxiliary cameras.
在一些实施例中,第一摄像头在手机中的位置可以是位于第二摄像头和第三摄像头之间。这样,作为主摄像头的第一摄像头便可以在主视场内捕捉待拍摄对象的信息。In some embodiments, the position of the first camera in the mobile phone may be between the second camera and the third camera. In this way, the first camera as the main camera can capture the information of the object to be photographed in the main field of view.
当手机包括第二摄像头、第一摄像头和第三摄像头时,在不同拍摄场景下,手机可以利用这些摄像头中的不同摄像头进行拍摄。即,手机可以从第二摄像头、第一摄像头和第三摄像头中选择适合当前拍摄场景的摄像头进行拍摄,从而可以在当前拍摄场景下获得较好的拍摄效果。When the mobile phone includes a second camera, a first camera, and a third camera, the mobile phone can use different cameras in these cameras to shoot in different shooting scenarios. That is, the mobile phone can select a camera suitable for the current shooting scene from the second camera, the first camera, and the third camera to shoot, so that a better shooting effect can be obtained in the current shooting scene.
以下通过举例的方式,对不同拍摄场景下手机可以利用/通过不同的摄像头进行拍摄予以说明。In the following, by way of example, the mobile phone can be photographed using / through different cameras in different shooting scenarios.
当手机检测到用户点击手机上的相机app图标的操作时,可以启动相机应用,显示如图4A所示的图形用户界面(graphical user interface,GUI),该GUI可以称为拍摄界面。该拍摄界面上显示有取景框400和用于指示摄像头的控件。该取景框400内可以显示摄像头采集到的预览图像(附图未示出预览图像)。用于指示摄像头的控件可以包括用于指示第二摄像头的控件401、用于指示第一摄像头的控件402和用于指示第三摄像头的控件403。在一些实施例中,用户可以根据当前拍摄场景确定要使用的摄像头,在拍摄界面上点击要使用的摄像头对应的控件,而后将摄像头对准待拍摄对象进行拍摄。手机检测到用户在拍摄界面上点击摄像头的控件的操作后,利用用户所选择的摄像头进行拍摄。在另一些实施例中,手机的摄像头对准待拍摄对象,手机的取景框400内显示有待拍摄对象的预览图像。用户根据当前拍摄场景以及取景框400内显示的预览图像的大小和预览图像的视野范围确定要使用的摄像头,并在拍摄界面上点击要使用的摄像头对应的控件。手机检测到用户在拍摄界面上点击摄像头的控件的操作后,利用用户所选择的摄像头进行拍摄。也就是说,用户可以根据当前拍摄场景手动选择要使用的摄像头,手机根据用户选择的摄像头进行拍摄。When the mobile phone detects that the user clicks on the camera app icon on the mobile phone, the camera application can be started to display a graphical user interface (GUI) as shown in FIG. 4A, which can be called a shooting interface. A
示例性的,手机默认采用第一摄像头进行拍摄,待拍摄对象的体积较大,例如待拍摄对象是一座高楼,一群人,或者一座长桥等,拍摄时需要摄像头的成像范围也较大,此时用户可以根据当前拍摄场景点击图4A中的控件401以选择使用第二摄像头,手机利用第二摄像头进行拍摄。在上述三个摄像头中,由于第二摄像头的成像范围最大,因而用户可以主动指定使用适合当前拍摄场景的第二摄像头进行拍摄,从而利用第二摄像头尽量将体积较大的待拍摄对象拍摄完整。Exemplarily, the mobile phone uses the first camera to shoot by default, and the volume of the object to be photographed is large. For example, the object to be photographed is a tall building, a group of people, or a long bridge. The imaging range of the camera is also large when shooting. When the user can click the control 401 in FIG. 4A according to the current shooting scene to choose to use the second camera, the mobile phone uses the second camera to shoot. Among the above three cameras, since the imaging range of the second camera is the largest, the user can actively designate to use the second camera suitable for the current shooting scene to shoot, so as to use the second camera to complete the shooting of the large-volume object to be photographed as much as possible.
需要注意的是,以上是以手机打开相机后默认采用第一摄像头进行拍摄为例进行说明的,手机打开相机后也可以默认采用第二摄像头或第三摄像头进行拍摄。或者,手机打开相机后,可以采用上次退出相机时用于采集图像的摄像头进行拍摄。本申请实施例不予限定。It should be noted that the above description is based on the example that the first camera is used for shooting by default after the mobile phone is turned on, and the second camera or the third camera can also be used for shooting after the mobile phone is turned on. Alternatively, after the camera is turned on by the mobile phone, the camera used to capture the image when the camera was last exited may be used for shooting. The embodiments of the present application are not limited.
再示例性的,如图4B所示,拍摄界面上显示有用于指示第二摄像头的控件404、用于指示第一摄像头的控件405和用于指示第三摄像头的控件406。待拍摄对象距离手机较近,且待拍摄对象的体积较小,例如待拍摄对象为手机附近的一个人物,此时用户可以根据当前拍摄场景点击控件405,以选择使用第一摄像头进行拍摄。在上述三个摄像头中,由于第一摄像头的成像范围居中,且成像质量最好,因而用户可以主动指定使用适合当前拍摄场景的第一摄像头进行拍摄,从而获得较好的拍摄效果。For another example, as shown in FIG. 4B, a
再示例性的,如图4C所示,拍摄界面上显示有用于指示第二摄像头的控件407、用于指示第一摄像头的控件408和用于指示第三摄像头的控件409。待拍摄对象距离手机较远,例如待拍摄对象为远处的一辆车,此时用户可以根据当前拍摄场景点击控件409,以选择使用第三摄像头进行拍摄。在上述三个摄像头中,由于第三摄像头的焦距最大,适于捕捉远景信息,因而用户可以主动指定使用适合当前拍摄场景的第三摄像头拍摄远处的物体,从而获得较好的拍摄效果。For another example, as shown in FIG. 4C, a control 407 for indicating the second camera, a
或者,在图4C所示情况下,若待拍摄对象距离手机较远,则用户也可以根据当前拍摄场景点击控件409和控件408,以选择使用第三摄像头和第一摄像头这两个摄像头进行拍摄。这样,手机可以将适于拍摄远景的第三摄像头以及成像质量最佳的第一摄像头采集的图像进行融合,从而获得更好的拍摄效果。Alternatively, in the case shown in FIG. 4C, if the object to be photographed is far from the mobile phone, the user can also click on the
再示例性的,如图4D所示,拍摄界面上显示有用于指示拍摄选项的控件410,当用户点击控件410时,手机可以显示如图4E所示的GUI,该GUI上显示有用于指示第二摄像头的控件411、用于指示第一摄像头的控件412和用于指示第三摄像头的控件413。当用户根据当前拍摄场景(例如拍摄较远处的一朵花时),点击至少一个摄像头的控件(例如第一摄像头控件412和第三摄像头控件413)时,手机利用用户所选择的至少一个摄像头进行拍摄。For another example, as shown in FIG. 4D, a
由以上描述可知,用户可以根据当前具体的拍摄场景选择适合该拍摄场景的至少一个摄像头进行拍摄,提高当前拍摄场景下的拍摄效果。与现有技术在任何拍摄场景下,均通过手机所具有的两个摄像头获取的图像进行简单融合,来得到最终拍摄获得的图像相比,本实施例提供的方法可以在多样、多变的拍摄场景下,实时切换到适合当前拍摄场景的摄像头或摄像头的组合获取的图像来得到最终拍摄获得的图像,因而能够在各拍摄场景下均获得效果较好的拍摄图像。As can be seen from the above description, the user can select at least one camera suitable for the shooting scene to shoot according to the current specific shooting scene, so as to improve the shooting effect in the current shooting scene. Compared with the existing technology, in any shooting scene, the images obtained by the two cameras of the mobile phone are simply merged to obtain the final captured image. The method provided in this embodiment can be used in a variety of and variable shooting In the scene, the image obtained by the camera or the combination of cameras suitable for the current shooting scene is switched in real time to obtain the image obtained by the final shooting, so that the shot image with better effect can be obtained in each shooting scene.
可以理解的是,用于指示第二摄像头、第一摄像头和第三摄像头的控件可以是不同的图标,也可以是相同的图标。例如,上述控件401、402、403可以是不同的图标,也可以是相同的图标。It can be understood that the controls for indicating the second camera, the first camera, and the third camera may be different icons, or may be the same icon. For example, the above controls 401, 402, 403 may be different icons or the same icon.
此外,拍摄界面上还可以包括用于指示自动切换摄像头的控件。示例性的,用于指示自动切换摄像头的控件可以是图4A中的控件414,当手机检测到用户点击控件414时,手机可以自动确定适合当前拍摄场景的摄像头,并自动切换到确定的摄像头进行拍摄。In addition, the shooting interface may also include a control for instructing to automatically switch the camera. Exemplarily, the control for instructing to automatically switch the camera may be the control 414 in FIG. 4A. When the mobile phone detects that the user clicks the control 414, the mobile phone may automatically determine the camera suitable for the current shooting scene and automatically switch to the determined camera Shooting.
以上主要是以用户根据不同拍摄场景主动指定不同摄像头进行拍摄为例,来说明不同拍摄场景下手机可以开启不同摄像头进行拍摄的。以下从变焦倍率K的角度,来说明不同拍摄场景下手机可以切换到不同的摄像头来进行拍摄。The above is mainly based on the example that the user actively designates different cameras to shoot according to different shooting scenarios to illustrate that the mobile phone can turn on different cameras to shoot in different shooting scenarios. In the following, from the perspective of the zoom magnification K, the mobile phone can be switched to different cameras for shooting in different shooting scenarios.
其中,变焦倍率K为第一焦距相对于第二焦距的缩/放倍数。其中,第二焦距为主摄像头即第一摄像头的焦距。第一焦距可以理解为一个等效焦距,并且F1=K*F2,其中,F1表示第一焦距,F2表示第二焦距。为便于理解,不同摄像头的感光元件上成像的视角可以转化为第一摄像头上同样成像视角所对应的镜头焦距,即可以将非第一摄像头的焦距折算为第一摄像头的焦距,折算后的焦距即为等效焦距。在变焦倍率为K时,可以等效为手机的第一摄像头采用变焦倍率K对应的第一焦距进行拍摄。举例来说,当用户通过手机拍摄10米处的物体时,预览图像中该物体将显示的比较小,如果 用户想要将预览图像中的物体放大2倍,则在手机所处位置不发生改变的情况下,手机可以采用变焦倍率K对应的第一焦距进行拍摄,等效于用户将手机移动到距离物体5米的位置处对该物体进行拍摄的效果,即等效于用户将第二焦距缩小了2倍,也就是说第一焦距等效于第二焦距的0.5倍。Among them, the zoom magnification K is the reduction / expansion ratio of the first focal length relative to the second focal length. The second focal length is the focal length of the first camera, that is, the focal length of the first camera. The first focal length can be understood as an equivalent focal length, and F1 = K * F2, where F1 represents the first focal length and F2 represents the second focal length. For ease of understanding, the angle of view imaged on the photosensitive elements of different cameras can be converted into the focal length of the lens corresponding to the same imaging angle of view on the first camera, that is, the focal length of the non-first camera can be converted into the focal length of the first camera, and the converted focal length This is the equivalent focal length. When the zoom magnification is K, it can be equivalent to that the first camera of the mobile phone shoots with the first focal length corresponding to the zoom magnification K. For example, when the user shoots an object at a distance of 10 meters through the mobile phone, the object in the preview image will be displayed smaller. If the user wants to enlarge the object in the preview image by 2 times, the location of the mobile phone will not change. In the case of the mobile phone, the mobile phone can use the first focal length corresponding to the zoom magnification K to shoot, which is equivalent to the effect of the user moving the mobile phone to a
例如,当变焦倍率K小于1时,该变焦倍率K可以理解为第一焦距相对于第二焦距的缩小倍数;当变焦倍率K大于1时,该变焦倍率K可以理解为第一焦距相对于第二焦距的放大倍数。当变焦倍率K等于1时,第一焦距可以理解为等于第二焦距。For example, when the zoom magnification K is less than 1, the zoom magnification K can be understood as the reduction ratio of the first focal length relative to the second focal length; when the zoom magnification K is greater than 1, the zoom magnification K can be understood as the first focal length relative to the first Magnification of two focal lengths. When the zoom magnification K is equal to 1, the first focal length can be understood as equal to the second focal length.
在一实施例中,当手机包括第二摄像头、第一摄像头和第三摄像头,且第一摄像头为主摄像头时,手机的变焦倍率K的取值范围可以为M≤K≤N。其中,M=tan(B/2)/tan(A/2),N=tan(B/2)/tan(C/2),A为第二摄像头的视场角,B为第一摄像头的视场角,C为第三摄像头的视场角,A大于B,B大于C。例如,A可以为120°,B可以为75°,C可以为30°。由上述公式可知,由于第二摄像头的视场角A大于第一摄像头的视场角B,因而M小于1;又由于第三摄像头的视场角C小于第一摄像头的视场角B,因而N大于1。也就是说,在本实施例中,变焦倍率K可以小于1,等于1,或者大于1,变焦倍率K的数值范围较大。In an embodiment, when the mobile phone includes a second camera, a first camera, and a third camera, and the first camera is the main camera, the value range of the zoom magnification K of the mobile phone may be M≤K≤N. Where M = tan (B / 2) / tan (A / 2), N = tan (B / 2) / tan (C / 2), A is the angle of view of the second camera, and B is the Angle of view, C is the angle of view of the third camera, A is greater than B, and B is greater than C. For example, A may be 120 °, B may be 75 °, and C may be 30 °. It can be seen from the above formula that since the field angle A of the second camera is larger than the field angle B of the first camera, M is less than 1; and because the field angle C of the third camera is smaller than the field angle B of the first camera, N is greater than 1. That is to say, in this embodiment, the zoom magnification K may be less than 1, equal to 1, or greater than 1, and the numerical range of the zoom magnification K is large.
在一实施例中,当变焦倍率K=1时,可以称为1×拍摄场景,即1倍焦距(即1倍主摄焦距)拍摄场景,手机采用第一摄像头进行拍摄,不进行变焦。当变焦倍率K不等于1时,可以称为变焦拍摄场景。手机在拍摄图像的过程中经常需要改变焦距。例如,用户通过手机在1×拍摄场景下拍摄远处的物体(例如人物、花草、建筑等)时,手机显示的预览图像中该物体会显示的较小。在不改变手机位置的情况下,若用户想要放大预览图像中的该物体,则手机可以进行变焦拍摄,且变焦倍率K大于1。在不改变手机位置的情况下,若用户想要缩小预览图像中的该物体,或者想要拍摄更大视野范围内的对象,则可以进行变焦拍摄,且变焦倍率K小于1。也就是说,变焦倍率K可以理解为图像的缩/放倍数K(或缩/放比例K),变焦倍率K越大,图像的缩/放倍数K越大,预览图像中物体的尺寸也越大;变焦倍率K越小,图像的缩/放倍数K越小,预览图像中物体的尺寸也越小。当变焦倍率K的数值范围较大时,相应的,图像的可缩/放范围也较大。In an embodiment, when the zoom magnification K = 1, it may be referred to as a 1 × shooting scene, that is, a shooting scene of 1 × focal length (that is, 1 × main shooting focal length). The mobile phone uses the first camera to shoot without zooming. When the zoom magnification K is not equal to 1, it can be called a zoom shooting scene. Mobile phones often need to change the focal length during the image capture process. For example, when a user shoots a distant object (such as people, flowers, buildings, etc.) in a 1 × shooting scene through a mobile phone, the object displayed in the preview image displayed on the mobile phone will be smaller. Without changing the position of the mobile phone, if the user wants to enlarge the object in the preview image, the mobile phone can perform zoom shooting with a zoom magnification K greater than 1. Without changing the position of the mobile phone, if the user wants to zoom out the object in the preview image, or wants to shoot an object in a larger field of view, zoom shooting can be performed, and the zoom magnification K is less than 1. That is to say, the zoom magnification K can be understood as the zoom-in / out magnification K (or zoom-in / out ratio K) of the image. The larger the zoom magnification K, the larger the zoom-in / out magnification K of the image, and the larger the size of the object in the preview image. Larger; the smaller the zoom magnification K, the smaller the image reduction / magnification factor K, and the smaller the size of the object in the preview image. When the value range of the zoom magnification K is large, correspondingly, the zoomable / zoomable range of the image is also large.
可以理解的,手机的每个摄像头都有一个焦距,每个摄像头分别采用各自的焦距采集图像。例如,第二摄像头的焦距可以是16mm,第一摄像头的焦距可以是27mm,第三摄像头的焦距可以是80mm。当手机利用第二摄像头采集图像时,第二摄像头使用16mm的焦距采集图像,变焦倍率K等于M,等效焦距为M*27mm;当手机利用第一摄像头采集图像时,第一摄像头使用27mm的焦距采集图像,变焦倍率K等于1;当手机利用第三摄像头采集图像时,第三摄像头使用80mm的焦距采集图像,变焦倍率K等于N,等效焦距为N*27mm。示例性的,手机利用第二摄像头采集到的图像可以如图5A所示;手机利用第一摄像头采集到图像可以如图5B所示;手机利用第三摄像头采集到的图像可以如图5C所示。手机可以对第二摄像头采集到的图像(例如图5A)进行裁切和放大处理,可以得到变焦倍率K大于M且小于1对应的图像(例如图5D);对第一摄像头采集到的图像(例如图5B)进行裁切和放大处理,可以得到变焦倍率K大于1且小于N的图像(例如图5E);对第三摄像头采集到的图像进行 裁切和放大处理,可以得到变焦倍率K大于N的图像(例如图5F)。Understandably, each camera of the mobile phone has a focal length, and each camera uses its own focal length to collect images. For example, the focal length of the second camera may be 16 mm, the focal length of the first camera may be 27 mm, and the focal length of the third camera may be 80 mm. When the mobile phone uses the second camera to collect images, the second camera uses a 16mm focal length to capture images, the zoom factor K is equal to M, and the equivalent focal length is M * 27mm; when the mobile phone uses the first camera to collect images, the first camera uses 27mm When capturing images with focal length, the zoom magnification K is equal to 1; when the mobile phone uses the third camera to capture images, the third camera uses an 80mm focal length to capture images, the zoom magnification K is equal to N, and the equivalent focal length is N * 27mm. Exemplarily, the image collected by the mobile phone using the second camera may be shown in FIG. 5A; the image collected by the mobile phone using the first camera may be shown in FIG. 5B; the image collected by the mobile phone using the third camera may be shown in FIG. 5C . The mobile phone can crop and enlarge the image collected by the second camera (such as FIG. 5A) to obtain an image corresponding to the zoom factor K greater than M and less than 1 (such as FIG. 5D); the image collected by the first camera ( For example, in Figure 5B), crop and zoom in to obtain an image with a zoom factor K greater than 1 and less than N (for example, Figure 5E); crop and zoom in on the image collected by the third camera to obtain a zoom factor K greater than An image of N (for example, Figure 5F).
因此,参见表1,在变焦倍率K等于1的1×拍摄场景下,手机可以利用第一摄像头进行拍摄,从而利用成像质量最高的第一摄像头采集的图像生成预览图像和拍摄获得的图像,获得较好的拍摄效果。Therefore, referring to Table 1, in a 1 × shooting scene where the zoom magnification K is equal to 1, the mobile phone can use the first camera to shoot, so that the image collected by the first camera with the highest imaging quality can be used to generate a preview image and the captured image to obtain Better shooting results.
参见表1,在变焦拍摄场景中,当变焦倍率K小于1且大于或者等于M时,等效焦距较小,用户可能想要拍摄的成像范围较大,手机可以利用第二摄像头进行变焦拍摄。从而,手机可以根据变焦倍率K,对第二摄像头采集到的图像进行裁切和放大,生成变焦倍率K对应的图像(例如预览图像或拍摄获得的图像)。这样,手机可以利用三个摄像头中成像范围最大的第二摄像头进行拍摄,以满足用户对成像范围的拍摄需求。Referring to Table 1, in a zoom shooting scene, when the zoom magnification K is less than 1 and greater than or equal to M, the equivalent focal length is small, the imaging range that the user may want to shoot is large, and the mobile phone can use the second camera to perform zoom shooting. Therefore, the mobile phone can crop and enlarge the image collected by the second camera according to the zoom magnification K to generate an image corresponding to the zoom magnification K (for example, a preview image or an image obtained by shooting). In this way, the mobile phone can use the second camera with the largest imaging range among the three cameras to shoot to meet the user's shooting requirements for the imaging range.
参见表1,在变焦拍摄场景中,当变焦倍率K大于1且小于N时,等效焦距较大,用户可能想要拍摄距离较近的物体,手机可以利用第一摄像头进行拍摄。从而,手机可以根据变焦倍率K对第一摄像头采集的图像进行裁剪和放大,生成变焦倍率K对应的图像。这样,手机可以利用三个摄像头中成像质量最高、分辨率最高、且像素最高的第一摄像头进行拍摄,以获得最佳的图像质量。Referring to Table 1, in a zoom shooting scene, when the zoom magnification K is greater than 1 and less than N, the equivalent focal length is large, and the user may want to shoot an object with a short distance. The mobile phone may use the first camera to shoot. Therefore, the mobile phone can crop and enlarge the image collected by the first camera according to the zoom magnification K to generate an image corresponding to the zoom magnification K. In this way, the mobile phone can use the first camera with the highest imaging quality, the highest resolution, and the highest pixels among the three cameras to shoot to obtain the best image quality.
参见表1,在变焦拍摄场景中,当变焦倍率K大于或者等于N时,等效焦距很大,用户可能想要拍摄远处的物体,或者用户可能想要将预览图像中的物体放大较高的倍数,手机可以利用第三摄像头进行拍摄。从而,手机可以根据变焦倍率K对第三摄像头采集的图像进行裁剪和放大,生成变焦倍率K对应的图像。这样,手机可以利用三个摄像头中适于捕捉远景信息的第三摄像头进行拍摄,以满足用户对远距离和大尺寸图像的拍摄需求。Referring to Table 1, in the zoom shooting scene, when the zoom magnification K is greater than or equal to N, the equivalent focal length is large, the user may want to shoot a distant object, or the user may want to zoom in on the object in the preview image higher Multiples, the phone can use the third camera to shoot. Therefore, the mobile phone can crop and enlarge the image collected by the third camera according to the zoom magnification K to generate an image corresponding to the zoom magnification K. In this way, the mobile phone can use a third camera suitable for capturing distant information among the three cameras to shoot, so as to meet the user's need for shooting long-distance and large-size images.
其中,手机利用某个摄像头进行拍摄是指,手机开启该摄像头,并利用该摄像头采集的信息生成图像(例如预览图像或拍摄获得的图像)。一种情况下,手机还可以开启该摄像头以外的其他摄像头,但不利用其他摄像头采集的信息生成图像。这样,当手机想要从该摄像头切换到其他进行拍摄时,可以实现无时延、快速切换。另一种情况下,手机可以关闭该摄像头以外的其他摄像头,以节省手机的功耗。Among them, the mobile phone uses a certain camera to shoot means that the mobile phone turns on the camera and uses the information collected by the camera to generate an image (for example, a preview image or an image obtained by shooting). In one case, the mobile phone can also turn on other cameras than the camera, but does not use the information collected by the other cameras to generate images. In this way, when the mobile phone wants to switch from the camera to another for shooting, it can achieve fast switching without delay. In another case, the mobile phone can turn off cameras other than the camera to save power consumption of the mobile phone.
例如,手机利用第一摄像头进行拍摄是指,手机开启第一摄像头,并利用第一摄像头采集的信息生成图像。对于第一摄像头以外的第二摄像头和第三摄像头,一种情况下,手机还可以开启第二摄像头和第三摄像头,但不利用第二摄像头和第三摄像头采集的信息生成图像。这样,当手机想要从第二摄像头切换到第二摄像头或切换到第三摄像头进行拍摄时,可以实现无时延、快速切换。另一种情况下,手机可以关闭第二摄像头和第三摄像头,以节省手机的功耗。For example, the mobile phone uses the first camera to shoot means that the mobile phone turns on the first camera and uses the information collected by the first camera to generate an image. For the second camera and the third camera other than the first camera, in one case, the mobile phone can also turn on the second camera and the third camera, but does not use the information collected by the second camera and the third camera to generate an image. In this way, when the mobile phone wants to switch from the second camera to the second camera or to the third camera for shooting, it can realize a fast switching without delay. In another case, the mobile phone can turn off the second camera and the third camera to save power consumption of the mobile phone.
表1Table 1
以上表1是以不同变焦倍率对应的拍摄场景下,手机利用一种摄像头进行拍摄为 例来说明的。在不同变焦倍率对应的拍摄场景下,手机还可以利用不同摄像头的组合来进行拍摄。Table 1 above illustrates the case where the mobile phone uses a camera to shoot under the shooting scenarios corresponding to different zoom magnifications. In shooting scenarios corresponding to different zoom magnifications, the mobile phone can also use a combination of different cameras to shoot.
例如,参见表2,在变焦倍率K=1时,手机在利用第一摄像头进行拍摄的基础上,还可以结合第二摄像头和/或第三摄像头进行拍摄。具体的,手机可以将第二摄像头采集的图像,以及第一摄像头采集的图像和/或第三摄像头采集的图像进行图像融合,从而生成成像质量更高的图像。即,手机可以至少利用第一摄像头进行拍摄。其中,图像融合的方式可以有多种,例如小波变化融合法,金字塔变化融合法等等,本实施例对此不作具体限定。For example, referring to Table 2, when the zoom magnification K = 1, the mobile phone can also use the second camera and / or the third camera to shoot on the basis of shooting with the first camera. Specifically, the mobile phone may perform image fusion on the image collected by the second camera, and the image collected by the first camera and / or the image collected by the third camera, thereby generating an image with higher imaging quality. That is, the mobile phone can use at least the first camera to shoot. There may be multiple ways of image fusion, such as wavelet change fusion method, pyramid change fusion method, etc., which is not specifically limited in this embodiment.
参见表2,在变焦倍率满足M≤K<1时,手机在利用第二摄像头进行拍摄的基础上,还可以结合第一摄像头和/或第三摄像头进行拍摄,从而通过图像融合生成成像质量更高的图像。即,手机可以至少利用第二摄像头进行拍摄。Referring to Table 2, when the zoom magnification satisfies M≤K <1, the mobile phone can also use the first camera and / or the third camera to shoot on the basis of shooting with the second camera, so that the image quality is generated by image fusion. High image. That is, the mobile phone can use at least the second camera to shoot.
参见表2,在变焦倍率满足1<K<N时,手机在利用第一摄像头进行拍摄的基础上,还可以结合第二摄像头和/或第三摄像头进行拍摄,从而通过图像融合生成成像质量更高的图像。即,手机可以至少利用第一摄像头进行拍摄。Referring to Table 2, when the zoom magnification satisfies 1 <K <N, the mobile phone can also use the second camera and / or the third camera to shoot on the basis of shooting with the first camera, so that the image quality is generated through image fusion. High image. That is, the mobile phone can use at least the first camera to shoot.
参见表2,在变焦倍率满足K≥N时,手机在利用第三摄像头进行拍摄的基础上,还可以结合第二摄像头和/或第一摄像头进行拍摄,从而通过图像融合生成成像质量更高的图像。即,手机可以至少利用第三摄像头进行拍摄。Referring to Table 2, when the zoom magnification satisfies K≥N, the mobile phone can also use the second camera and / or the first camera to shoot on the basis of shooting with the third camera, thereby generating a higher imaging quality through image fusion image. That is, the mobile phone can use at least the third camera to shoot.
表2Table 2
可以理解的是,当利用表1所示的变焦倍率与摄像头的对应关系确定摄像头并进行拍摄时,由于在不同拍摄场景下,手机仅利用适用于当前拍摄场景的一个摄像头进行拍摄,因而可以节省手机的功耗和电量;当利用表2所示的变焦倍率与摄像头的对应关系确定摄像头并进行拍摄时,由于手机需要使用多个摄像头采集信息,通过对多个摄像头采集的信息进行融合来生成图像,因而成像质量更高,拍摄效果更好。It can be understood that when the camera is determined and shot using the correspondence between the zoom magnification and the camera shown in Table 1, since the mobile phone uses only one camera suitable for the current shooting scene to shoot in different shooting scenarios, it can save The power consumption and power of the mobile phone; when the camera is used to determine the camera and shoot using the corresponding relationship between the zoom magnification and the camera shown in Table 2, since the mobile phone needs to use multiple cameras to collect information, it is generated by fusing the information collected by the multiple cameras The image, therefore the imaging quality is higher and the shooting effect is better.
在一些实施例中,手机可以根据用户用于指示变焦倍率的操作确定目标变焦倍率,根据目标变焦倍率确定对应的目标摄像头,并利用目标变焦倍率对应的目标摄像头进行拍摄。例如,拍摄界面上显示有用于指示变焦倍率(或称缩/放倍数)的控件,比如 图6A中所示的0.6×控件601、1×控件602、2×控件、5×控件和10×控件等,当前变焦倍率为1×。如图6B所示,当用户点击控件601以指示目标变焦倍率为0.6×(或称目标变焦倍率为0.6)时,手机可以根据表1或表2所示的变焦倍率与摄像头的对应关系确定与目标变焦倍率0.6×对应的目标摄像头(例如根据表1确定为第二摄像头),进而可以根据目标变焦倍率和目标摄像头采集到的信息生成图像。In some embodiments, the mobile phone may determine the target zoom magnification according to the user's operation for indicating the zoom magnification, determine the corresponding target camera according to the target zoom magnification, and use the target camera corresponding to the target zoom magnification to shoot. For example, the shooting interface displays controls for indicating the zoom magnification (or zoom in / out magnification), such as the 0.6 ×
再例如,参见图7A,拍摄界面上显示有变焦倍率标尺(或称缩/放倍率标尺)701,当前变焦倍率为2×。如图7B所示,当手机检测到用户通过手指在拍摄界面上(或在变焦倍率标尺上)做了一个手势(例如捏合)时,响应于该手势,手机可以根据该手势确定一个目标变焦倍率(例如为1×),拍摄界面上可以通过该变焦倍率标尺显示手机当前根据该手势确定的目标变焦倍率。而后,手机可以根据表1或表2所示的变焦倍率与摄像头的对应关系,确定该目标变焦倍率对应的目标摄像头(例如根据表1确定为第一摄像头),从而可以根据目标变焦倍率和目标摄像头采集到的信息生成图像。As another example, referring to FIG. 7A, a zoom magnification scale (or zoom / zoom scale) 701 is displayed on the shooting interface, and the current zoom magnification is 2 ×. As shown in FIG. 7B, when the mobile phone detects that the user made a gesture (for example, pinch) on the shooting interface (or on the zoom magnification scale) with a finger, in response to the gesture, the mobile phone can determine a target zoom magnification according to the gesture (For example, 1 ×), the zoom magnification scale can be used to display the target zoom magnification currently determined by the mobile phone according to the gesture on the shooting interface. Then, the mobile phone can determine the target camera corresponding to the target zoom magnification according to the corresponding relationship between the zoom magnification and the camera shown in Table 1 or Table 2 (for example, the first camera is determined according to Table 1), so that it can be based on the target zoom magnification and the target The information collected by the camera generates an image.
在一实施例中,变焦倍率K与摄像头的对应关系是预置在手机中的。在另一实施例中,在不同情况下,手机可以根据表1或表2所示的对应关系,选择与变焦倍率K对应的不同的摄像头或不同摄像头的组合进行拍摄。例如,在低功耗拍摄模式下,手机可以根据表1所示的变焦倍率与摄像头的对应关系,确定目标变焦倍率对应的目标摄像头;在高质量拍摄模式下,手机可以根据表2中倒数第二列和倒数第三列所示的变焦倍率与摄像头的对应关系,确定目标变焦倍率对应的目标摄像头;在超级拍摄模式下,手机可以利用表2最后一列所示的三个摄像头进行拍摄。In an embodiment, the correspondence between the zoom magnification K and the camera is preset in the mobile phone. In another embodiment, in different situations, the mobile phone may select different cameras or a combination of different cameras corresponding to the zoom magnification K to shoot according to the correspondence shown in Table 1 or Table 2. For example, in the low-power shooting mode, the mobile phone can determine the target camera corresponding to the target zoom magnification according to the correspondence between the zoom magnification and the camera shown in Table 1. In the high-quality shooting mode, the mobile phone can use the penultimate The corresponding relationship between the zoom magnification and the camera shown in the second column and the penultimate column determines the target camera corresponding to the target zoom magnification; in the super shooting mode, the mobile phone can use the three cameras shown in the last column of Table 2 to shoot.
其中,在高质量拍摄模式下,手机根据表2中倒数第二列和倒数第三列所示的变焦倍率与摄像头的对应关系,确定目标变焦倍率对应的目标摄像头时,可以根据取景框内显示的预览图像上的内容确定目标变焦倍率对应的目标摄像头。Among them, in the high-quality shooting mode, the mobile phone can determine the target camera corresponding to the target zoom magnification according to the corresponding relationship between the zoom magnification and the camera shown in the penultimate column and the penultimate column in Table 2, which can be displayed according to the viewfinder. The content on the preview image determines the target camera corresponding to the target zoom magnification.
例如,在M≤K<1的情况下,若预览图像上的内容包括人物,且人物位于较为居中的位置,则手机可以确定目标摄像头为第二摄像头和第三摄像头。即,在利用第二摄像头进行拍摄的基础上,手机可以结合第三摄像头进行图像融合。其中,第三摄像头的视场角较小,可以用于捕捉中间位置的人物信息,使得人物部分的图像更为清晰。For example, in the case of M≤K <1, if the content on the preview image includes a person, and the person is located in a relatively central position, the mobile phone may determine that the target camera is the second camera and the third camera. That is, on the basis of shooting with the second camera, the mobile phone can perform image fusion in conjunction with the third camera. Among them, the field of view of the third camera is small, which can be used to capture the information of the person in the middle position, so that the image of the person part is clearer.
否则,在M≤K<1的情况下,手机可以确定目标摄像头为第二摄像头和第一摄像头。即,在利用第二摄像头进行拍摄的基础上,手机可以结合视野范围居中的第一摄像头进行图像融合。由于融合部分的图像质量高,第一摄像头的视野范围大于第三摄像头的视野范围,因而与利用第二摄像头和第三摄像头进行拍摄相比,利用第二摄像头和第一摄像头进行拍摄使得可进行融合的图像的视野范围更大,因而可以使得更大视野范围内的图像成像较为清晰。Otherwise, in the case of M≤K <1, the mobile phone may determine that the target camera is the second camera and the first camera. That is, on the basis of shooting with the second camera, the mobile phone can perform image fusion in conjunction with the first camera with a central field of view. Due to the high image quality of the fusion part, the field of view of the first camera is larger than the field of view of the third camera. Therefore, compared to shooting with the second camera and the third camera, shooting with the second camera and the first camera makes it possible to perform The field of view of the fused image is larger, so the image in the larger field of view can be made clearer.
再例如,在1≤K<N时,若预览图像上的内容包括风景且不包括人物,则手机可以确定目标摄像头为第一摄像头和第二摄像头。即,在利用第一摄像头进行拍摄的基础上,手机还可以利用第二摄像头视野范围大的特性,获取更大范围内的风景图像,与第二摄像头获取的图像进行融合,从而使得整个风景图像的成像较为清晰。For another example, when 1 ≦ K <N, if the content on the preview image includes a landscape and does not include a person, the mobile phone may determine that the target camera is the first camera and the second camera. That is, on the basis of shooting with the first camera, the mobile phone can also take advantage of the wide field of view characteristic of the second camera to acquire a landscape image in a larger range and merge it with the image acquired by the second camera to make the entire landscape image Imaging is clearer.
在1≤K<N时,若预览图像上包括人物,且人物位于较为居中的位置,则手机可以确定目标摄像头为第一摄像头和第三摄像头,视场角较小的第三摄像头可以用于捕捉中间位置的人物信息,使得人物部分的图像更为清晰。When 1≤K <N, if the preview image includes a person, and the person is in a more central position, the mobile phone can determine that the target camera is the first camera and the third camera, and the third camera with a smaller field angle can be used for Capturing the character information in the middle position makes the image of the character part clearer.
再例如,在K≥N时,若预览图像上的内容包括风景,则手机可以确定目标摄像头为第三摄像头和第二摄像头。即,在利用第三摄像头进行拍摄的基础上,手机还可以利用第二摄像头视野范围大的特性,获取更大范围内的风景图像。For another example, when K≥N, if the content on the preview image includes a landscape, the mobile phone may determine that the target camera is a third camera and a second camera. That is, on the basis of shooting with the third camera, the mobile phone can also take advantage of the large field of view characteristic of the second camera to acquire landscape images in a larger range.
否则,在K≥N时,手机可以确定目标摄像头为第三摄像头和第一摄像头。即,在利用第三摄像头进行拍摄的基础上,手机还可以利用第一摄像头成像质量高的特点,获取融合后的更为清晰的图像。Otherwise, when K≥N, the mobile phone may determine that the target camera is the third camera and the first camera. That is, on the basis of shooting with the third camera, the mobile phone can also take advantage of the high imaging quality of the first camera to obtain a clearer image after fusion.
在另一实施例中,手机还可以根据待拍摄对象、待拍摄对象的成像大小或待拍摄对象的距离等在拍摄时自动确定目标变焦倍率,而后根据表1或表2所示的变焦倍率与摄像头的对应关系,确定该目标变焦倍率对应的目标摄像头,从而可以根据目标变焦倍率和目标摄像头采集到的信息生成图像。In another embodiment, the mobile phone can also automatically determine the target zoom magnification at the time of shooting according to the object to be photographed, the imaging size of the object to be photographed, or the distance of the object to be photographed, and then according to the zoom magnifications shown in Table 1 or Table 2 The corresponding relationship of the cameras determines the target camera corresponding to the target zoom magnification, so that an image can be generated according to the information collected by the target zoom magnification and the target camera.
例如,在拍照时,手机可以根据待拍摄对象与手机之间的距离自动确定目标变焦倍率,而后根据目标变焦倍率确定目标摄像头,并根据目标变焦倍率和目标摄像头采集到的信息生成图像。其中,手机确定待拍摄对象的距离的方式可以有多种。比如手机可以通过两个摄像头采集的图像的视差来确定待拍摄对象的距离。当待拍摄对象与手机之间的距离大于预设值1且小于预设值2时,手机确定目标变焦倍率大于M且小于1;当待拍摄对象与手机之间的距离大于或者等于预设值2且小于预设值3时,手机确定目标变焦倍率大于或者等于1且小于N;当待拍摄对象与手机之间的距离大于或者等于预设值3时,手机确定目标变焦倍率大于或者等于N。其中,预设值1小于预设值2,预设值2小于预设值3。For example, when taking pictures, the mobile phone can automatically determine the target zoom magnification according to the distance between the object to be photographed and the mobile phone, and then determine the target camera according to the target zoom magnification, and generate an image based on the target zoom magnification and the information collected by the target camera. Among them, there are many ways for the mobile phone to determine the distance of the object to be photographed. For example, the mobile phone can determine the distance of the object to be shot through the parallax of the images collected by the two cameras. When the distance between the object to be photographed and the mobile phone is greater than the
再例如,在拍摄视频(即录像)时,手机还可以根据摄像头采集到的图像识别待拍摄对象,根据待拍摄对象在图像中的大小确定变焦倍率,根据变焦倍率确定摄像头,并自动切换到变焦倍率对应的摄像头进行拍摄。手机根据切换后的摄像头采集到的图像生成构图,根据构图和变焦倍率对摄像头采集到的图像进行裁切和缩/放,从而生成下一帧视频图像。也就是说,在拍摄视频的过程中,手机可以自动变焦,并根据变化后的变焦倍率实时切换到对应的摄像头进行拍摄。As another example, when shooting video (ie, video), the mobile phone can also identify the object to be shot according to the image collected by the camera, determine the zoom ratio according to the size of the object in the image, determine the camera according to the zoom ratio, and automatically switch to zoom Shoot with the camera corresponding to the magnification. The mobile phone generates a composition according to the image collected by the switched camera, and crops and reduces / expands the image collected by the camera according to the composition and zoom magnification, thereby generating the next frame of video image. In other words, in the process of shooting video, the mobile phone can automatically zoom, and switch to the corresponding camera in real time to shoot according to the changed zoom magnification.
当待拍摄对象处于运动状态时,在手机的位置不发生改变的情况下,若该待拍摄对象距离手机较近,则该待拍摄对象在图像上呈现的尺寸较大;若该待拍摄对象与手机的距离变远,则该待拍摄对象在图像上呈现的尺寸较小,用户可能无法看清楚该待拍摄对象。而运动中的待拍摄对象与手机的距离通常是时而近时而远的,待拍摄对象在图像上的尺寸也时而大时而小,不便于用户对待拍摄对象的观察和记录。When the object to be photographed is in motion, and the position of the mobile phone does not change, if the object to be photographed is closer to the mobile phone, the size of the object to be photographed on the image is larger; if the object to be photographed is As the distance of the mobile phone becomes longer, the size of the object to be photographed on the image is smaller, and the user may not be able to clearly see the object to be photographed. However, the distance between the object to be photographed in motion and the mobile phone is usually near and far, and the size of the object to be photographed on the image is also sometimes large and small, which is not convenient for the user to observe and record the object to be photographed.
在本实施例中,手机可以设定待拍摄对象在画面上的参考尺寸(例如,待拍摄对象为人物,人物在图像上的参考尺寸为整个图像尺寸的1/3),该参考尺寸在拍摄过程中是固定的。可以理解的是,不同待拍摄对象对应的参考尺寸可以不同。在拍摄视频的过程中,手机可以根据当前帧拍摄获得的图像中待拍摄对象的实际尺寸与参考尺寸的比例关系确定变焦倍率,根据变焦倍率确定拍摄下一帧图像需要使用的摄像头。而后,手机根据所确定的摄像头采集图像,根据采集的图像生成构图,根据构图和确定的变焦倍率对采集的图像进行裁切和缩/放处理,以使得待拍摄对象在图像上的实际尺寸与参考尺寸基本一致。In this embodiment, the mobile phone can set the reference size of the object to be photographed on the screen (for example, the object to be photographed is a person, the reference size of the person on the image is 1/3 of the entire image size), the reference size is The process is fixed. It can be understood that the reference sizes corresponding to different objects to be photographed may be different. In the process of shooting a video, the mobile phone can determine the zoom magnification according to the ratio between the actual size of the object to be captured in the image captured in the current frame and the reference size, and the camera to be used to capture the next frame of image according to the zoom magnification. Then, the mobile phone collects images according to the determined camera, generates a composition according to the collected image, and performs cropping and reduction / expansion processing on the collected image according to the composition and the determined zoom magnification, so that the actual size of the object to be captured on the image is The reference size is basically the same.
具体的,在手机位置不动的情况下,当运动状态的待拍摄对象距离手机较近时, 摄像头采集到的待拍摄对象在图像上的实际尺寸较大,参考尺寸与实际尺寸的比值小于1,即图像缩/放比例K也就是变焦倍率K小于1。手机可以根据变焦倍率K进行画面裁切,以使得待拍摄对象在图像上的尺寸基本不变,且待拍摄对象在图像上的尺寸基本为参考尺寸。当运动状态的待拍摄对象距离手机较远时,摄像头采集到的待拍摄对象在图像上的实际尺寸较小,参考尺寸与实际尺寸的比值即变焦倍率K大于1。手机可以根据变焦倍率K进行画面裁切,以使得待拍摄对象在图像上的尺寸基本不变。Specifically, when the position of the mobile phone is not moving, when the moving object to be photographed is closer to the mobile phone, the actual size of the object to be photographed on the image collected by the camera is larger, and the ratio of the reference size to the actual size is less than 1. , That is, the image reduction / expansion ratio K, that is, the zoom magnification K is less than 1. The mobile phone can perform image cropping according to the zoom magnification K, so that the size of the object to be photographed on the image is basically unchanged, and the size of the object to be photographed on the image is basically the reference size. When the object to be photographed in the moving state is far from the mobile phone, the actual size of the object to be photographed collected by the camera on the image is small, and the ratio of the reference size to the actual size, that is, the zoom magnification K is greater than 1. The mobile phone can cut the screen according to the zoom magnification K, so that the size of the object to be photographed on the image is basically unchanged.
这样,在视频拍摄过程中,手机通过实时确定新的变焦倍率,实时切换到新的变焦倍率对应的摄像头来采集图像,实时根据新的变焦倍率对采集到的图像进行处理,从而得到待拍摄对象的尺寸基本相同的视频图像,便于用户观察和记录。In this way, during the video shooting process, the mobile phone determines the new zoom magnification in real time, switches to the camera corresponding to the new zoom magnification in real time to collect the image, and processes the collected image in real time according to the new zoom magnification to obtain the object to be photographed The size of the video image is basically the same, which is convenient for users to observe and record.
需要说明的是,在手机的自动变焦的过程中,变焦倍率的范围可以为M到N,变焦范围较大,变焦自由度较大。此外,与目前手机根据图像中心点进行画面裁切不同,本实施例根据构图进行画面裁切。由于构图可能是动态变化的,因而要求待裁切的画面需要很大的视野范围才能满足根据构图进行画面裁切的需求。本实施例中的第二摄像头可以提供足够大的视野范围的待裁切画面,满足该裁切需求。It should be noted that, during the automatic zooming process of the mobile phone, the zoom magnification range may be M to N, the zoom range is larger, and the zoom freedom is greater. In addition, unlike the current mobile phone that cuts the screen according to the center point of the image, this embodiment cuts the screen based on the composition. Since the composition may change dynamically, the picture to be cut requires a large field of view to meet the needs of the picture cut according to the composition. The second camera in this embodiment can provide a picture to be cropped with a sufficiently large field of view to meet the cropping requirement.
在另一些实施例中,在视频拍摄过程中,手机可以保持开启第二摄像头。这样,在手机位置不变的情况下,当待拍摄对象的位置向左或向右变化且变化速度较快时,由于第二摄像头可以捕捉更大的视野范围内的信息,因而第二摄像头可以捕捉到向左或向右变化后的待拍摄对象。从而,手机可以根据第二摄像头捕捉到的画面信息进行裁切,以使得视频拍摄过程中记录的画面上能够始终包括待拍摄对象。可见,第二摄像头可以为手机提供较大的裁切范围和裁切自由。In other embodiments, during the video shooting process, the mobile phone may keep the second camera turned on. In this way, when the position of the mobile phone is unchanged, when the position of the object to be photographed changes to the left or right and the change speed is faster, the second camera can capture information in a larger field of view, so the second camera can The subject to be captured after changing to the left or right is captured. Therefore, the mobile phone can perform cropping according to the picture information captured by the second camera, so that the picture recorded during the video shooting process can always include the object to be shot. It can be seen that the second camera can provide a larger cutting range and freedom for the mobile phone.
示例性的,参见图8,在手机对踢足球的小女孩进行录像时,第二摄像头可以拍摄的视野范围较大。当小女孩在足球场上忽远忽近,忽左忽右跑动时,第二摄像头均可以采集到小女孩的图像信息。如图8中的虚线所示,手机可以从第二摄像头采集到的图像中裁切一部分进行放大处理,从而生成录像过程中的图像。Exemplarily, referring to FIG. 8, when the mobile phone records the little girl playing football, the field of view that the second camera can shoot is relatively large. When the little girl runs far and near on the football field, and suddenly runs left and right, the second camera can collect the image information of the little girl. As indicated by the dotted line in FIG. 8, the mobile phone can cut a part of the image collected by the second camera to perform an enlargement process, thereby generating an image during recording.
可见,与现有技术在任何拍摄场景下,均通过手机所具有的两个摄像头获取的图像进行简单融合,来得到最终拍摄获得的图像相比,本实施例提供的方法可以在多样、多变的拍摄场景下,采用适合当前拍摄场景的一个或多个摄像头采集的图像来得到最终拍摄获得的图像,因而能够在各拍摄场景下均获得质量较高的拍摄图像。从而,当拍摄场景发生变化时,手机可以实时切换到适合变化后的拍摄场景的一个或多个摄像头采集的图像来得到最终拍摄获得的图像,因而在任何拍摄场景下均可获得质量较高的拍摄图像。It can be seen that compared with the prior art, in any shooting scenario, the images obtained by the two cameras of the mobile phone are simply fused to obtain the final captured image. The method provided in this embodiment can be diverse and changeable. In the shooting scene, the images collected by one or more cameras suitable for the current shooting scene are used to obtain the final captured image, so that a high-quality captured image can be obtained in each shooting scene. Therefore, when the shooting scene changes, the mobile phone can switch to the image captured by one or more cameras suitable for the changed shooting scene in real time to obtain the final captured image, so that in any shooting scene, a higher quality can be obtained Take an image.
以上主要是从变焦倍率的角度,来说明不同拍摄场景下手机可以利用不同摄像头进行拍摄的。以下主要从手机自动识别拍摄场景,并根据识别出的拍摄场景自动切换或提示用户切换到适合当前拍摄场景的摄像头进行拍摄为例,来说明不同拍摄场景下手机可以利用不同的摄像头进行拍摄。The above is mainly from the perspective of zoom magnification to illustrate that the mobile phone can use different cameras to shoot in different shooting scenarios. The following mainly focuses on automatically identifying the shooting scene from the mobile phone, and automatically switching or prompting the user to switch to a camera suitable for the current shooting scene according to the identified shooting scene to take an example to illustrate that the mobile phone can use different cameras to shoot in different shooting scenarios.
(1)、超广角拍摄场景(1), super wide-angle shooting scene
当待拍摄对象的体积较大,例如待拍摄对象为一座高楼、一座长桥、一群人或一个建筑群等等时,手机在进行拍摄时,需要很大的成像视野。在上述三个摄像头中,由于第二摄像头具有最大的成像视野,因而当手机确定需要很大的成像视野,或者需 要扩大成像视野时,可以自动切换到第二摄像头进行超广角拍摄,或者可以提示用户切换到第二摄像头进行超广角拍摄。其中,由于手机预览时在手机上显示的图像的尺寸是固定的,因而当扩大成像视野时,手机预览图像上的物体会缩小,因此超广角拍摄模式下的变焦倍率K小于1。When the volume of the object to be photographed is large, for example, the object to be photographed is a tall building, a long bridge, a group of people or a group of buildings, etc., the mobile phone needs a large imaging field of view when photographing. Among the above three cameras, since the second camera has the largest imaging field of view, when the mobile phone determines that it needs a large imaging field of view, or needs to expand the imaging field of view, it can automatically switch to the second camera for ultra-wide-angle shooting, or can prompt The user switches to the second camera for ultra-wide-angle shooting. Among them, since the size of the image displayed on the mobile phone during the preview of the mobile phone is fixed, when the imaging field of view is expanded, the object on the preview image of the mobile phone will be reduced, so the zoom magnification K in the ultra-wide-angle shooting mode is less than 1.
示例性的,参见图9A,待拍摄对象为埃菲尔铁塔,控件901用于表示手机当前采用标准模式即第一摄像头的1×拍摄模式进行拍摄,手机通过第一摄像头采集的图像识别到埃菲尔铁塔没有拍全,采集的图像中仅显示了埃菲尔铁塔的一部分,没有包括完整的埃菲尔铁塔。需要扩大成像视野,因而手机可以自动切换到第二摄像头进行拍摄,并且,参见图9B,手机还可以提示用户“已自动切换到超广角拍摄模式”,控件902用于表示手机当前采用超广角模式进行拍摄。由图9B可知,当采用第二摄像头进行拍摄时,成像视野更大,可以完整地拍摄整个埃菲尔铁塔。Exemplarily, referring to FIG. 9A, the object to be photographed is the Eiffel Tower, and the control 901 is used to indicate that the mobile phone is currently shooting in the standard mode, that is, the 1 × shooting mode of the first camera, and the mobile phone recognizes that the Eiffel Tower does not Full shot, the collected image only shows a part of the Eiffel Tower, not including the complete Eiffel Tower. Need to expand the imaging field of view, so the mobile phone can automatically switch to the second camera for shooting, and, referring to FIG. 9B, the mobile phone can also prompt the user to "have automatically switched to the ultra-wide-angle shooting mode", the
再示例性的,参见图10A,待拍摄对象为多个人物,控件1001用于表示手机当前采用标准模式(即第一摄像头的1×拍摄模式)进行拍摄,手机通过第一摄像头采集的图像识别到人物没有拍全,仅捕捉到了一部分人物,或者捕捉到了这多个人物中某个人物的部分部位而没有将整个该人物拍摄完整,需要扩大成像视野。在一种情况下,手机可以提示用户“当前视野范围较小,是否切换到视野范围更大的第二摄像头?”。当用户点击“是”时,手机切换到第二摄像头进行拍摄。或者,在另一种情况下,参见图10A,手机可以在拍摄界面上通过提示框1002来提示用户“当前视野范围较小,是否切换到超广角拍摄模式”。当用户点击“是”时,手机切换到第二摄像头进行超广角拍摄,并且,参见图10B,手机通过控件1003来表示当前已切换到超广角拍摄模式。其中,控件1003在显示一段时间后可以自动消失。或者,在另一种情况下,手机自动在拍摄界面上显示超广角拍摄模式控件,以方便用户通过点击该超广角拍摄模式控件切换到第二摄像头进行拍摄。或者,在另一种情况下,手机自动在拍摄界面上显示变焦倍率控件,该变焦倍率控件表示的变焦倍率K小于1,例如可以为0.6×,以方便用户通过点击该变焦倍率控件切换到第二摄像头进行拍摄。或者,在另一种情况下,手机可以通过语音提示用户“是否切换到第二摄像头以拍摄更大范围的画面”,若用户语音输入“是”,或者用户语音输入“切换”等指示切换的语句,则手机切换到第二摄像头进行拍摄。For another example, referring to FIG. 10A, the object to be photographed is a plurality of people, and the
此外,在1×拍摄场景下,手机开启第一摄像头进行拍摄。拍摄界面上显示有超广角拍摄模式控件,当用户确定需要更大的成像视野时,点击超广角拍摄模式,手机可以切换到第二摄像头进行拍摄。In addition, in the 1 × shooting scene, the mobile phone turns on the first camera to shoot. The ultra-wide-angle shooting mode control is displayed on the shooting interface. When the user determines that a larger imaging field of view is needed, click the ultra-wide-angle shooting mode, and the mobile phone can switch to the second camera to shoot.
在手机确定不需要很大成像视野的情况下,手机还可以自动切换回采用第一摄像头进行拍摄。例如,当手机的摄像头移开埃菲尔铁塔,待拍摄对象切换为一个较小的物体时,手机确定不需要很大的成像视野,采用第一摄像头的视野范围即可进行拍摄,因而可以切换回第一摄像头进行拍摄。或者,当手机在本次采用第二摄像头拍摄完成后,可以自动切换回采用第一摄像头进行拍摄。When the mobile phone determines that it does not require a large imaging field of view, the mobile phone can also automatically switch back to using the first camera for shooting. For example, when the camera of the mobile phone moves away from the Eiffel Tower and the object to be photographed is switched to a smaller object, the mobile phone determines that it does not need a large imaging field of view. A camera to shoot. Or, when the mobile phone uses the second camera for shooting this time, it can automatically switch back to using the first camera for shooting.
需要说明的是,以上是以超广角拍摄场景下,手机利用第二摄像头进行拍摄为例进行说明的。在其他一些实施例中,在超广角拍摄场景下,手机还可以结合第二摄像头和其他摄像头进行拍摄。也就是说,在超广角拍摄场景下,手机至少可以采用第二 摄像头进行拍摄。It should be noted that the above description is based on an example where the mobile phone uses the second camera to shoot in the ultra-wide-angle shooting scene. In some other embodiments, in the ultra-wide-angle shooting scene, the mobile phone may also shoot with the second camera and other cameras. In other words, in the ultra-wide-angle shooting scene, the mobile phone can at least use the second camera to shoot.
(2)、微距拍摄场景(2), macro shooting scene
当手机检测到待拍摄对象与手机的距离小于或者等于预设值4(例如该预设值4可以为10cm)时,待拍摄对象与手机的距离很近,当前拍摄场景为微距拍摄场景。在微距拍摄场景下,待拍摄对象在预览图像上的尺寸较大,手机可以通过第二摄像头捕捉更大视野范围内的信息,从而尽量捕捉到待拍摄对象的完整信息。When the mobile phone detects that the distance between the object to be photographed and the mobile phone is less than or equal to a preset value 4 (for example, the preset value 4 may be 10 cm), the distance between the object to be photographed and the mobile phone is very close, and the current shooting scene is a macro shooting scene. In the macro shooting scene, the size of the object to be photographed on the preview image is large, and the mobile phone can capture information in a larger field of view through the second camera, so as to capture the complete information of the object to be photographed as much as possible.
例如,手机可以通过距离传感器180F确定待拍摄对象与手机的距离。或者,手机可以通过预设的对焦算法确定待拍摄对象与手机的距离。当该距离小于或者等于预设值4时,手机可以确定待拍摄对象与手机的距离较近,因而可以自动切换到第二摄像头进行拍摄,或者提示用户切换到第二摄像头进行拍摄。For example, the mobile phone can determine the distance between the object to be photographed and the mobile phone through the distance sensor 180F. Alternatively, the mobile phone may determine the distance between the object to be photographed and the mobile phone through a preset focusing algorithm. When the distance is less than or equal to the preset value 4, the mobile phone can determine that the distance between the object to be photographed and the mobile phone is short, so it can automatically switch to the second camera to shoot, or prompt the user to switch to the second camera to shoot.
示例性的,参见图11A,待拍摄对象为一朵花,控件1101用于表示手机当前采用标准模式(即第一摄像头的1×拍摄模式)进行拍摄,手机确定待拍摄对象与手机的距离小于或者等于预设值4,手机通过提示框1102在拍摄界面上显示“拍摄距离很近,是否切换到微距模式?”,若用户选择“是”,则如图11B所示,手机切换到微距模式,采用第二摄像头进行拍摄。其中,控件1103用于表示当前处于微距拍摄模式。另外,拍摄界面上还显示有关闭控件1104,当用户点击关闭控件1104时,手机不再显示控件1103。Exemplarily, referring to FIG. 11A, the object to be photographed is a flower, the control 1101 is used to indicate that the mobile phone is currently shooting in the standard mode (that is, the 1 × shooting mode of the first camera), and the mobile phone determines that the distance between the object to be photographed and the mobile phone is less than Or equal to the preset value 4, the mobile phone displays "the shooting distance is very close, switch to macro mode?" Through the
此外,在1x拍摄模式下,手机可以采用第一摄像头进行拍摄。拍摄界面上显示有微距拍摄模式控件,当用户确定待拍摄对象距离手机很近,并点击微距拍摄模式时,手机可以切换到第二摄像头进行微距拍摄。In addition, in the 1x shooting mode, the mobile phone can use the first camera to shoot. A macro shooting mode control is displayed on the shooting interface. When the user determines that the object to be shot is close to the mobile phone and clicks the macro shooting mode, the mobile phone can switch to the second camera for macro shooting.
在手机的摄像头移开距离很近的待拍摄对象后,手机可以切换回采用第一摄像头进行拍摄。或者,当手机在本次采用第二摄像头拍摄完成后,可以自动切换回采用第一摄像头进行拍摄。After the camera of the mobile phone moves away from the object to be photographed at a close distance, the mobile phone can switch back to use the first camera to shoot. Or, when the mobile phone uses the second camera for shooting this time, it can automatically switch back to using the first camera for shooting.
其中,当待拍摄对象与摄像头距离很近时,物距很小,第二摄像头的成像通常是模糊的,手机可以通过内置的马达(或称电机)移动第二摄像头内感光元件的位置或者移动第二摄像头镜片的位置,以增大像距,使得第二摄像头能够对焦,从而使得微距拍摄场景下能够成像清晰。Among them, when the object to be photographed is very close to the camera, the object distance is very small, and the image of the second camera is usually blurred. The mobile phone can move the position or movement of the photosensitive element in the second camera through the built-in motor (or motor) The position of the lens of the second camera is to increase the image distance, so that the second camera can focus, so that the macro shooting scene can be imaged clearly.
需要说明的是,以上是以在微距拍摄场景下,手机采用第二摄像头进行拍摄为例说明的。在其他一些实施例中,在微距拍摄场景下,手机还可以结合第二摄像头和其他摄像头进行拍摄。也就是说,在微距拍摄场景下,手机至少可以采用第二摄像头进行拍摄,此处不予赘述。It should be noted that the above is described by taking an example in which the mobile phone uses a second camera to shoot in a macro shooting scene. In some other embodiments, in the macro shooting scene, the mobile phone may also shoot in combination with the second camera and other cameras. That is to say, in the macro shooting scene, the mobile phone can at least use the second camera to shoot, which will not be repeated here.
(3)、远景拍摄场景(3), distant shooting scene
当手机确定与待拍摄对象之间的距离大于或者等于预设值5(例如可以为5米)时,可以确定当前为远景拍摄场景,因而可以采用视场角更小、焦距更长的适用于远景拍摄的第三摄像头进行拍摄。具体的,手机可以在确定与待拍摄对象之间的距离大于或者等于预设值5时自动切换,或者提示用户切换,或者在接收到用户的指示后切换到第三摄像头进行远景拍摄。并且,在远景拍摄场景下,变焦倍率K较大,例如变焦倍率K可以大于N。When the mobile phone determines that the distance to the object to be photographed is greater than or equal to a preset value of 5 (for example, 5 meters), it can be determined that the current scene is a distant scene, so a smaller field of view and a longer focal length can be used. The third camera for distant shooting is used for shooting. Specifically, the mobile phone may automatically switch when it is determined that the distance to the object to be photographed is greater than or equal to the
示例性的,参见图12,待拍摄对象为足球场另一端的足球,当手机确定待拍摄对 象与手机的距离较远时,手机可以自动切换到利用第三摄像头进行远景拍摄。其中,控件1201用于表示当前拍摄场景为远景拍摄模式。Exemplarily, referring to FIG. 12, the object to be shot is a football on the other end of the football field. When the mobile phone determines that the distance between the object to be shot and the mobile phone is far, the mobile phone can automatically switch to use the third camera for distant shooting. The
在手机的摄像头移开距离很远的待拍摄对象后,手机可以切换回采用第一摄像头进行拍摄。或者,当手机在本次采用第三摄像头拍摄完成后,可以自动切换回采用第一摄像头进行拍摄。After the camera of the mobile phone moves away from the object to be photographed far away, the mobile phone can switch back to adopt the first camera to shoot. Or, when the mobile phone uses the third camera for shooting this time, it can automatically switch back to using the first camera for shooting.
需要说明的是,以上是以在远景拍摄场景下,手机采用第三摄像头进行拍摄为例说明的。在其他一些实施例中,在远景拍摄场景下,手机还可以结合第三摄像头和其他摄像头进行拍摄。也就是说,在远景拍摄场景下,手机至少可以采用第三摄像头进行拍摄,此处不予赘述。It should be noted that the above is described by taking an example in which the mobile phone uses a third camera to shoot in a distant shooting scene. In some other embodiments, in the remote shooting scene, the mobile phone may also shoot with the third camera and other cameras. That is to say, in the distant shooting scene, the mobile phone can at least use the third camera to shoot, which will not be repeated here.
还需要说明的是,以上是以1×正常拍摄场景与超广角拍摄场景之间进行切换为例,或者以1×正常拍摄场景与远景拍摄场景之间进行切换为例,或者以1×正常拍摄场景与微距拍摄场景之间进行切换为例进行说明的。手机还可以在1×正常拍摄场景、超广角拍摄场景、远景拍摄场景以及微距拍摄场景之间相互切换,并实时切换到适用于当前拍摄场景的摄像头进行拍摄,此处不予赘述。It should also be noted that the above is an example of switching between a 1 × normal shooting scene and a super wide-angle shooting scene, or a case of switching between a 1 × normal shooting scene and a distant shooting scene, or a 1 × normal shooting Switching between the scene and the macro shooting scene is explained as an example. The mobile phone can also switch between 1 × normal shooting scene, super wide-angle shooting scene, distant shooting scene and macro shooting scene, and switch to the camera suitable for the current shooting scene in real time for shooting, which will not be repeated here.
与现有技术在任何拍摄场景下,均通过手机所具有的两个摄像头获取的图像进行简单融合,来得到最终拍摄获得的图像相比,本实施例提供的方法可以在多样、多变的拍摄场景下,实时切换到适合当前拍摄场景的摄像头或摄像头的组合来获取图像,从而生成最终拍摄获得的图像,因而能够在各拍摄场景下均获得质量较高的拍摄图像。Compared with the existing technology, in any shooting scene, the images obtained by the two cameras of the mobile phone are simply merged to obtain the final captured image. The method provided in this embodiment can be used in a variety of and variable shooting In the scene, the camera or a combination of cameras suitable for the current shooting scene is switched in real time to obtain an image, thereby generating an image obtained by the final shooting, so that a high-quality shot image can be obtained in each shooting scene.
在其他一些实施例中,在拍照时,手机可以自动识别待拍摄对象,根据待拍摄对象进行构图,并提示用户根据构图指示进行拍摄操作,以获得更好的拍摄效果。例如,手机可以根据构图指示用户上、下、左、右、前、后平移手机,或者提示用户上、下、左、右旋转手手机,或者提示用户前、后翻转手机等。In some other embodiments, when taking a picture, the mobile phone can automatically recognize the object to be photographed, compose a composition according to the object to be photographed, and prompt the user to perform a shooting operation according to the composition instruction to obtain a better shooting effect. For example, the mobile phone can instruct the user to pan the phone up, down, left, right, front, and back according to the composition, or prompt the user to rotate the hand phone up, down, left, or right, or to prompt the user to flip the phone forward and back.
示例性的,参见图13A,手机可以提示用户请根据提示将手机移动至目标位置;参见图13B,手机可以提示用户请向前翻转手机。Exemplarily, referring to FIG. 13A, the mobile phone may prompt the user to move the mobile phone to the target position according to the prompt; referring to FIG. 13B, the mobile phone may prompt the user to turn the mobile phone forward.
在本实施例中,若手机当前利用摄像头1进行拍摄,根据第二摄像头采集的第一图像和预设构图算法生成第一构图,并进行图像预览,且摄像头1不是第二摄像头,则手机还可以开启第二摄像头。在开启第二摄像头后,手机可以根据第二摄像头采集的更大视野范围的画面,对第一构图进行检验,以确定第一构图是否合理。其中,由于第二摄像头采集的第二图像的视野范围更大,可以包括摄像头1采集到的图像以外的更多的信息,而根据更多的信息生成的第二构图更为准确,即手机根据第二图像生成的构图更为准确。因而,若手机确定第二构图中与第一图像对应的那部分构图与第一构图一致,则手机确定第一构图合理,第一构图与第二构图匹配,手机采用第一构图提示用户进行拍摄操作。In this embodiment, if the mobile phone currently uses the
若手机确定第二构图中与第一图像对应的那部分构图与第一构图不一致,则手机确定第一构图不合理,手机可以根据第二构图提示用户进行拍摄操作。或者,若手机确定第一构图不合理,则手机自动切换为利用第二摄像头进行构图和拍摄。或者,若手机确定第一构图不合理,则手机可以提示用户是否切换到视野范围更大的第二摄像头进行构图和拍摄。例如,参见图13C,手机可以通过提示框1301提示用户是否切换到视野范围更大的摄像头进行构图和拍摄。若用户选择“是”,则手机切换到第二摄像 头进行构图和拍摄,从而可以在不改变位置的情况下,扩大可拍摄的视野范围;若用户选择“否”,则手机利用摄像头1进行构图和拍摄。也就是说,利用第二摄像头具有很大视野范围的特点,手机可以得到更为合理的构图,从而提示用户根据更为合理的构图进行拍摄,获得更好的拍摄效果。If the mobile phone determines that the part of the composition corresponding to the first image in the second composition is inconsistent with the first composition, the mobile phone determines that the first composition is unreasonable, and the mobile phone may prompt the user to perform a shooting operation according to the second composition. Or, if the mobile phone determines that the first composition is unreasonable, the mobile phone automatically switches to use the second camera for composition and shooting. Or, if the mobile phone determines that the first composition is unreasonable, the mobile phone may prompt the user whether to switch to the second camera with a larger field of view for composition and shooting. For example, referring to FIG. 13C, the mobile phone may prompt the user through a
示例性的,在图13A-图13C所示的场景下,若第二摄像头采集到的图像中还包括小女孩旁边的一只小猫,根据第二摄像头采集的图像生成的第二构图包括小女孩、花朵、妈妈和小猫即各自的位置,且小女孩、花朵、妈妈在图像中的位置更靠右一些,因而手机确定根据第二摄像头采集的图像生成的第一构图不合理,手机切换到第二摄像头,根据第二摄像头采集的图像生成的第二构图提示用户进行拍摄操作,最终拍摄获得如图13D所示的图像。Exemplarily, in the scenario shown in FIGS. 13A-13C, if the image collected by the second camera also includes a kitten next to the little girl, the second composition generated from the image collected by the second camera includes the small Girls, flowers, moms and kittens are their respective positions, and the position of the little girl, flowers, mom in the image is more to the right, so the mobile phone determines that the first composition generated from the image collected by the second camera is unreasonable, and the mobile phone switches To the second camera, the second composition generated based on the image collected by the second camera prompts the user to perform a shooting operation, and finally shoots to obtain the image as shown in FIG. 13D.
在一些实施例中,在各拍摄场景下,手机在确定所要利用的摄像头之后,可以获取摄像头采集的图像,并将获取的图像进行处理得到待拍摄对象的图像。以手机利用上述三个摄像头进行拍摄为例,该过程可以包括:In some embodiments, in each shooting scene, after determining the camera to be used, the mobile phone may acquire the image collected by the camera, and process the acquired image to obtain the image of the object to be photographed. Taking the mobile phone using the above three cameras as an example, the process may include:
手机确定三个摄像头中每个摄像头采集图像的帧数。一种方式为,手机根据待拍摄对象所处环境的亮度,分别控制每个摄像头采集对应帧数的图像。举例来说,当亮度较小时,手机可以控制每个摄像头采集较多帧的图像。当亮度较大时,手机可以控制每个摄像头采集较少帧的图像。这是因为,待拍摄对象所处亮度可以影响摄像头采集的图像的信噪比。若亮度较小时,采集的图像的信噪比较低,即采集的图像中有效信号与噪声的比值较低,噪声所占的成分较大。此时,为了获得足够的有效信号,手机可以控制摄像头采集较多帧的图像。若亮度较大时,采集的图像的信噪比较大,即采集的图像中有效信号与噪声的比值较大,也就是说噪声所占的成分较小。此时,无需采集较多的图像即可得到足够的有效信号,所以手机可以控制摄像头可以采集较少帧图像。当然,手机还可以通过其它方式来确定每个摄像头采集图像的帧数,本实施例不作具体的限定。The mobile phone determines the number of frames captured by each of the three cameras. One method is that the mobile phone controls each camera to collect images corresponding to the number of frames according to the brightness of the environment in which the object to be photographed is located. For example, when the brightness is low, the mobile phone can control each camera to collect more frames of images. When the brightness is large, the mobile phone can control each camera to collect images with fewer frames. This is because the brightness of the object to be photographed can affect the signal-to-noise ratio of the image collected by the camera. If the brightness is small, the signal-to-noise of the collected image is relatively low, that is, the ratio of effective signal to noise in the collected image is low, and the noise accounted for a large component. At this time, in order to obtain a sufficient effective signal, the mobile phone can control the camera to collect more frames of images. If the brightness is large, the signal-to-noise of the collected image is relatively large, that is, the ratio of effective signal to noise in the collected image is large, that is, the component of the noise is small. At this time, there is no need to collect more images to get enough effective signals, so the mobile phone can control the camera to collect fewer frames of images. Of course, the mobile phone can also determine the number of frames captured by each camera in other ways, which is not specifically limited in this embodiment.
手机确定每个摄像头采集图像的帧数之后,每个摄像头便采集对应帧数的图像。After the mobile phone determines the number of frames captured by each camera, each camera collects images corresponding to the number of frames.
而后,手机可以分别将每个摄像头采集的图像进行预处理。预处理过程如下:Then, the mobile phone can preprocess the images collected by each camera separately. The pretreatment process is as follows:
手机可以将每个摄像头采集的图像进行降噪处理,并将经过降噪处理后的所有帧图像融合得到一个信噪比相对较高的图像。这样,每个摄像头便会对应一个信噪比相对较高的图像。然后,手机可以将每个摄像头对应的图像再次融合,初步获得一个待拍摄对象的图像,该图像可以直接作为最终的待拍摄对象的图像。The mobile phone can perform noise reduction processing on the images collected by each camera, and fuse all the frame images after the noise reduction processing to obtain an image with a relatively high signal-to-noise ratio. In this way, each camera corresponds to an image with a relatively high signal-to-noise ratio. Then, the mobile phone can fuse the image corresponding to each camera again to initially obtain an image of the object to be photographed, and the image can be directly used as the final image of the object to be photographed.
当然,为了提高最终的待拍摄对象的图像的质量,手机还可以对初步得到的待拍摄对象的图像做进一步的处理。例如手机可以根据场景深度信息,对初步得到的待拍摄对象的图像进行图像增强处理,以提高最终的待拍摄对象的图像的质量。Of course, in order to improve the quality of the final image of the object to be photographed, the mobile phone may further process the image of the object to be photographed initially obtained. For example, the mobile phone may perform image enhancement processing on the initially obtained image of the object to be captured according to the scene depth information, so as to improve the quality of the final image of the object to be captured.
本实施例中,手机确定场景深度信息的方式可以有多种。例如手机可以通过两个摄像头采集的图像的视差来确定场景的深度信息。比如,在K大于或者等于1且小于N时,手机可以根据第二摄像头和第一摄像头采集到的图像来产生深度信息;在K大于或者等于N时,手机可以根据第二摄像头和第一摄像头采集到的图像来产生深度信息。当然还有其它的实现方式,本实施例不作具体的限定。In this embodiment, the mobile phone may determine the scene depth information in various ways. For example, the mobile phone can determine the depth information of the scene through the parallax of the images collected by the two cameras. For example, when K is greater than or equal to 1 and less than N, the phone can generate depth information based on the images collected by the second camera and the first camera; when K is greater than or equal to N, the phone can use the second camera and the first camera The acquired images are used to generate depth information. Of course, there are other implementation methods, and this embodiment is not specifically limited.
手机根据场景深度信息对初步得到的待拍摄对象的图像进行图像增强处理的方式 也可以有多种。例如,手机可以根据场景深度信息只对初步得到的待拍摄对象的图像整体进行对比度和清晰度的图像增强处理,以提高最终的待拍摄对象的图像的立体感和层次感。再例如手机可以根据场景深度信息只对初步得到的待拍摄对象的图像中的前景例如人像的清晰度进行图像增强处理,对背景的清晰度不做处理,或者对进行图像模糊处理,类似于用户使用大光圈拍照的情况,从而实现个性化拍摄。再例如,手机还可以根据场景深度信息对初步得到的待拍摄对象的图像上用户选择的区域的清晰度进行图像增强处理,对其他区域不做处理或者进行图像模糊处理,类似于用户先拍照后对焦的效果,从而实现个性化拍摄。There may also be many ways for the mobile phone to perform image enhancement processing on the image of the object to be initially captured according to the scene depth information. For example, the mobile phone may only perform image enhancement processing of contrast and sharpness on the overall image of the object to be captured initially based on scene depth information, so as to improve the three-dimensional and layered sense of the final image of the object to be captured. For another example, the mobile phone can perform image enhancement processing only on the foreground, such as the sharpness of the portrait, in the image of the object to be captured based on the depth information of the scene, without processing the sharpness of the background, or blurring the image, similar to the user The situation of taking pictures with a large aperture to achieve personalized shooting. For another example, the mobile phone can also perform image enhancement processing on the clarity of the area selected by the user on the image of the subject to be initially captured according to the depth information of the scene, without processing other areas or performing image blur processing, similar to the user first taking a picture Focusing effect to achieve personalized shooting.
手机在得到待拍摄对象的图像之后,可以将待拍摄对象的图像输出,例如显示于手机的显示屏等。当然,还可以有其它的实现方式,本实施例不作具体限定。After obtaining the image of the object to be photographed, the mobile phone may output the image of the object to be photographed, for example, displayed on the display screen of the mobile phone. Of course, there may be other implementation manners, and this embodiment is not specifically limited.
结合上述实施例及相关附图,本实施例提供了一种拍摄的方法,该方法可以在如图1、图3所示的具有触摸屏的电子设备(例如手机、平板电脑等)中实现。该电子设备包括广角彩色摄像头(即上述第一摄像头)、超广角彩色摄像头(即上述第二摄像头)和长焦彩色摄像头(即上述第三摄像头)。如图14所示,该方法可以包括以下步骤:With reference to the above embodiments and related drawings, this embodiment provides a shooting method, which can be implemented in electronic devices (such as mobile phones, tablet computers, etc.) with touch screens as shown in FIGS. 1 and 3. The electronic device includes a wide-angle color camera (that is, the first camera), an ultra-wide-angle color camera (that is, the second camera), and a telephoto color camera (that is, the third camera). As shown in FIG. 14, the method may include the following steps:
步骤1401、电子设备检测到用户用于打开相机的第一操作。Step 1401: The electronic device detects the first operation of the user for turning on the camera.
示例性的,用户用于打开相机的第一操作可以为,用户点击电子设备上相机app图标的操作。Exemplarily, the first operation that the user uses to open the camera may be an operation that the user clicks the camera app icon on the electronic device.
步骤1402、响应于第一操作,电子设备在触摸屏上显示拍摄界面。Step 1402: In response to the first operation, the electronic device displays a shooting interface on the touch screen.
电子设备响应于用户用于打开相机的第一操作,可以进入拍摄模式,并显示拍摄界面。示例性的,拍摄界面可以为图4A、图4B、图4C或图6A等所示的界面。The electronic device can enter the shooting mode and display the shooting interface in response to the first operation of the user for turning on the camera. Exemplarily, the shooting interface may be the interface shown in FIG. 4A, FIG. 4B, FIG. 4C, or FIG. 6A.
步骤1403、电子设备通过广角彩色摄像头捕捉图像。
其中,广角彩色摄像头为广角彩色摄像头,根据以上分析可知,在广角彩色摄像头、超广角彩色摄像头和长焦彩色摄像头中,广角彩色摄像头的成像质量最好,且视场角较大,因而可以使用广角彩色摄像头作为主摄像头来进行拍摄,默认使用广角彩色摄像头来捕捉图像。Among them, the wide-angle color camera is a wide-angle color camera. According to the above analysis, among the wide-angle color camera, ultra-wide-angle color camera, and telephoto color camera, the wide-angle color camera has the best imaging quality and a large field of view, so it can be used. The wide-angle color camera is used as the main camera to shoot, and the wide-angle color camera is used to capture images by default.
步骤1404、电子设备在触摸屏上显示广角彩色摄像头捕捉到的图像。Step 1404: The electronic device displays the image captured by the wide-angle color camera on the touch screen.
示例性的,触摸屏上显示的广角彩色摄像头捕捉到的图像,可以是图6A中所示的埃菲尔铁塔的图像。Exemplarily, the image captured by the wide-angle color camera displayed on the touch screen may be the image of the Eiffel Tower shown in FIG. 6A.
步骤1405、电子设备检测到用户用于指示变焦的第二操作。Step 1405: The electronic device detects the second operation of the user to instruct zooming.
示例性的,用户用于指示变焦的第二操作可以为,如图6B所示的用户点击用于指示变焦倍率控件(例如控件601)的操作。再示例性的,用户用于指示变焦的第二操作还可以为,如图7B所示的用户的捏合操作。Exemplarily, the second operation for the user to instruct zooming may be, as shown in FIG. 6B, the user clicks an operation for instructing a zoom magnification control (eg, control 601). For another example, the second operation for the user to instruct zooming may also be a user's pinch operation as shown in FIG. 7B.
步骤1406、响应于第二操作,电子设备切换到通过超广角彩色摄像头或长焦彩色摄像头捕捉图像。Step 1406: In response to the second operation, the electronic device switches to capture the image through the ultra-wide-angle color camera or the telephoto color camera.
示例性的,当第二操作为如图6B所示的用户点击用于指示变焦倍率控件的操作时,电子设备可以切换到超广角彩色摄像头捕捉图像。Exemplarily, when the second operation is an operation for the user to click a zoom magnification control as shown in FIG. 6B, the electronic device may switch to the ultra-wide-angle color camera to capture the image.
1407、电子设备在触摸屏上显示超广角彩色摄像头或长焦彩色摄像头捕捉到的图像。1407. The electronic device displays the image captured by the ultra-wide-angle color camera or the telephoto color camera on the touch screen.
示例性的,当第二操作为如图6B所示的用户点击用于指示变焦倍率控件的操作时,电子设备可以切换到超广角彩色摄像头捕捉图像可以为图6B中所示的埃菲尔铁塔的图像。Exemplarily, when the second operation is an operation that the user clicks to indicate the zoom magnification control as shown in FIG. 6B, the electronic device may switch to the ultra-wide-angle color camera to capture the image may be the image of the Eiffel Tower shown in FIG. 6B .
在步骤1401-1407描述的方案中,用户可以根据当前拍摄场景进行变焦指示,电子设备可以根据用户的变焦指示自动在广角彩色摄像头、超广角彩色摄像头和长焦彩色摄像头之间进行切换,从而通过与用户的变焦指示相匹配的,能够适应于当前拍摄场景的摄像头进行图像捕捉和拍摄,获得较好的拍摄效果。In the solution described in steps 1401-1407, the user can perform zoom instructions according to the current shooting scene, and the electronic device can automatically switch between the wide-angle color camera, the ultra-wide-angle color camera, and the telephoto color camera according to the user's zoom instruction, thereby passing Matching with the user's zoom indication, the camera can adapt to the current shooting scene to capture and shoot images, and obtain better shooting results.
在一实施例中,拍摄界面上包括至少一个用于指示变焦倍率的第一控件,第二操作为用户针对第一控件的预设操作。示例性的,该第一控件可以是图6A、图6B中所示的控件601、控件602等,或者可以是图7A和图7B中的变焦倍率标尺等。In an embodiment, the shooting interface includes at least one first control for indicating the zoom magnification, and the second operation is a user's preset operation for the first control. Exemplarily, the first control may be the
在另一实施例中,拍摄界面上包括至少一个用于指示摄像头的第二控件,第二操作为用户针对第二控件的预设操作。示例性的,该第二控件可以是图4A中的控件401-控件403,或者图4B中所示的控件404-控件406等。In another embodiment, the shooting interface includes at least one second control for instructing the camera, and the second operation is a user's preset operation for the second control. Exemplarily, the second control may be control 401-control 403 in FIG. 4A, or control 404-
在一实施例中,上述步骤1406可以具体包括:响应于第二操作,电子设备确定变焦倍率K;若M≤K<1,则电子设备切换到通过超广角彩色摄像头捕捉图像;若K≥N,则电子设备切换到通过长焦彩色摄像头捕捉图像;其中,M=tan(B/2)/tan(A/2),N=tan(B/2)/tan(C/2),A为超广角彩色摄像头的视场角,B为广角彩色摄像头的视场角,C为长焦彩色摄像头的视场角,且A大于B,B大于C。此外,若1≤K<N,则电子设备通过广角彩色摄像头捕捉图像。In an embodiment, the
也就是说,电子设备可以首先确定变焦倍率,而后可以根据表1所示的变焦倍率与摄像头的对应关系,自动切换到与变焦倍率对应的一个摄像头来捕捉图像。That is to say, the electronic device can first determine the zoom magnification, and then can automatically switch to a camera corresponding to the zoom magnification to capture an image according to the correspondence between the zoom magnification and the camera shown in Table 1.
在另一实施例中,上述步骤1406可以包括:响应于第二操作,电子设备确定变焦倍率K;若M≤K<1,则电子设备切换到通过超广角彩色摄像头捕捉图像,以及通过广角彩色摄像头和/或长焦彩色摄像头捕捉图像;若K≥N,则电子设备切换到通过长焦彩色摄像头捕捉图像,以及通过广角彩色摄像头和/或超广角彩色摄像头捕捉图像。In another embodiment, the
也就是说,电子设备可以首先确定变焦倍率,而后可以根据表2所示的变焦倍率与摄像头的对应关系,自动切换到与变焦倍率对应的多个摄像头来捕捉图像,以提高图像成像质量。That is to say, the electronic device can first determine the zoom magnification, and then can automatically switch to multiple cameras corresponding to the zoom magnification to capture images according to the correspondence between the zoom magnification and the cameras shown in Table 2, so as to improve the image imaging quality.
在另一实施例中,在检测到用户指示变焦之前,电子设备还可以自动切换摄像头。例如,参见图15,在上述步骤1405之前,该方法还可以包括:In another embodiment, before detecting that the user indicates zooming, the electronic device may also automatically switch the camera. For example, referring to FIG. 15, before the
1408、若当前用于捕捉图像的摄像头为广角彩色摄像头或长焦彩色摄像头,待拍摄对象与电子设备的距离小于或者等于第一预设值,则电子设备自动切换到通过超广角彩色摄像头捕捉图像。1408. If the current camera for capturing images is a wide-angle color camera or a telephoto color camera, and the distance between the object to be photographed and the electronic device is less than or equal to the first preset value, the electronic device automatically switches to capturing the image through the ultra-wide-angle color camera .
示例性的,第一预设值可以为上述预设值4,参见图11A-图11B,若待拍摄对象与电子设备的距离小于或者等于预设值4,则当前拍摄模式为微距模式,电子设备自动切换到超广角彩色摄像头捕捉图像。Exemplarily, the first preset value may be the preset value 4, as shown in FIGS. 11A-11B, if the distance between the object to be photographed and the electronic device is less than or equal to the preset value 4, the current shooting mode is macro mode, The electronic device automatically switches to the ultra-wide-angle color camera to capture the image.
1409、若当前用于捕捉图像的摄像头为广角彩色摄像头或超广角彩色摄像头,待拍摄对象与电子设备的距离大于或者等于第二预设值,则电子设备自动切换到通过长焦彩色摄像头捕捉图像,第二预设值大于第一预设值。1409. If the current camera for capturing an image is a wide-angle color camera or an ultra-wide-angle color camera, and the distance between the object to be photographed and the electronic device is greater than or equal to the second preset value, the electronic device automatically switches to capturing the image through the telephoto color camera , The second preset value is greater than the first preset value.
示例性的,第一预设值可以为上述预设值5,参见图12,若待拍摄对象与电子设备的距离大于或者等于预设值5,则当前拍摄模式为远景模式,电子设备自动切换到长焦彩色摄像头捕捉图像。Exemplarily, the first preset value may be the
在另一实施例中,在上述步骤1405之前,该方法还可以包括:In another embodiment, before the
1410、若当前用于捕捉图像的摄像头为广角彩色摄像头或长焦彩色摄像头,且触摸屏上显示的捕捉到的图像包括待拍摄对象的一部分,则电子设备自动切换到通过超广角彩色摄像头捕捉图像。1410. If the current camera for capturing an image is a wide-angle color camera or a telephoto color camera, and the captured image displayed on the touch screen includes a part of the object to be photographed, the electronic device automatically switches to capturing the image through the ultra-wide-angle color camera.
示例性的,当前用于捕捉图像的摄像头为广角彩色摄像头,待拍摄对象为埃菲尔铁塔,图9A所示的拍摄界面的预览图像上仅显示了待拍摄对象的一部分,未能显示完整的待拍摄对象,则如图9B所示,电子设备可以自动切换到视场角更广的广角彩色摄像头捕捉图像。Exemplarily, the current camera used to capture the image is a wide-angle color camera, and the object to be photographed is the Eiffel Tower. The preview image of the shooting interface shown in FIG. 9A only shows a part of the object to be photographed, but the complete image to be photographed cannot be displayed As shown in Figure 9B, the electronic device can automatically switch to a wide-angle color camera with a wider field of view to capture images.
再示例性的,当前用于捕捉图像的摄像头为广角彩色摄像头,待拍摄对象为一群人,图10A所示的拍摄界面的预览图像上仅显示了待拍摄对象的一部分,未能显示完整的待拍摄对象,则如图10B所示,电子设备可以自动切换到视场角更广的广角彩色摄像头捕捉图像。As another example, the current camera used to capture the image is a wide-angle color camera, and the object to be photographed is a group of people. The preview image of the shooting interface shown in FIG. 10A shows only a part of the object to be photographed, but the complete image cannot be displayed. For the subject, as shown in FIG. 10B, the electronic device can automatically switch to a wide-angle color camera with a wider field of view to capture the image.
在另一实施例中,在上述步骤1404之前,该方法还可以包括:In another embodiment, before
1411、电子设备根据当前用于捕捉图像的摄像头捕捉的第一图像生成第一构图。1411. The electronic device generates a first composition according to the first image captured by the camera currently used to capture the image.
示例性的,当前用于捕捉图像的摄像头为广角彩色摄像头,第一图像可以为图13A或图13B所示的预览图像。Exemplarily, the camera currently used to capture the image is a wide-angle color camera, and the first image may be the preview image shown in FIG. 13A or 13B.
1412、若当前用于捕捉图像的摄像头为广角彩色摄像头或长焦彩色摄像头,则电子设备还通过超广角彩色摄像头捕捉第二图像。1412. If the camera currently used to capture the image is a wide-angle color camera or a telephoto color camera, the electronic device also captures the second image through the ultra-wide-angle color camera.
当前用于捕捉图像的摄像头为广角彩色摄像头,不是超广角彩色摄像头,则电子设备还通过超广角彩色摄像头捕捉第二图像。The current camera used to capture the image is a wide-angle color camera, not an ultra-wide-angle color camera, the electronic device also captures the second image through the ultra-wide-angle color camera.
1413、电子设备根据超广角彩色摄像头捕捉的第二图像生成第二构图。1413. The electronic device generates a second composition according to the second image captured by the ultra-wide-angle color camera.
1414、若第一构图与第二构图不匹配,则电子设备提示用户是否切换摄像头。1414. If the first composition does not match the second composition, the electronic device prompts the user whether to switch the camera.
若第一构图与第二构图不匹配,则可以表明第一构图不合理,电子设备可以提示用户是否切换摄像头。示例性的,电子设备可以通过图13C所示的提示框1301提示用户是否切换到视野范围更大的摄像头进行构图和拍摄。If the first composition does not match the second composition, it may indicate that the first composition is unreasonable, and the electronic device may prompt the user whether to switch the camera. Exemplarily, the electronic device may prompt the user through the
1415、若检测到用户用于指示切换摄像头的操作,则电子设备停止通过当前用于捕捉图像的摄像头继续捕捉图像。1415. If the user's operation for instructing to switch the camera is detected, the electronic device stops capturing the image through the camera currently used to capture the image.
示例性的,用户用于指示切换摄像头的操作可以为用户在提示框1301上选择“是”的操作,响应于该操作,电子设备可以停止通过广角彩色摄像头捕捉图像。Exemplarily, the operation for the user to instruct to switch the camera may be an operation in which the user selects "Yes" on the
1416、电子设备根据超广角彩色摄像头捕捉的第二图像和第二构图提示用户进行拍摄。1416. The electronic device prompts the user to shoot according to the second image and the second composition captured by the ultra-wide-angle color camera.
示例性的,电子设备根据超广角彩色摄像头捕捉的图像画面可以参见图13D。Exemplarily, the image frame captured by the electronic device according to the ultra-wide-angle color camera can be seen in FIG. 13D.
此外,若第一构图与第二构图匹配,则可以表明第一构图是合理的,电子设备可以继续通过广角彩色摄像头捕捉的第一图像和第一构图提示用户进行拍摄。若检测到用户用于指示不切换摄像头的操作,或者若未检测到用户用于指示切换摄像头的操作,则电子设备可以继续通过广角彩色摄像头捕捉的第一图像和第一构图提示用户进行拍 摄。In addition, if the first composition matches the second composition, it may indicate that the first composition is reasonable, and the electronic device may continue to prompt the user to take the first image and the first composition captured by the wide-angle color camera. If the user's operation for instructing not to switch the camera is detected, or if the user's operation for instructing to switch the camera is not detected, the electronic device may continue to prompt the user to take the first image and the first composition captured by the wide-angle color camera.
在另一实施例中,该方法还可以包括:In another embodiment, the method may further include:
1417、若当前用于捕捉图像的摄像头为广角彩色摄像头或长焦彩色摄像头,且待拍摄对象为风景,则电子设备通过当前用于捕捉图像的摄像头和长广角彩色摄像头捕捉图像。1417. If the camera currently used to capture the image is a wide-angle color camera or a telephoto color camera, and the object to be photographed is a landscape, the electronic device captures the image through the camera currently used to capture the image and the long wide-angle color camera.
1418、电子设备将当前用于捕捉图像的摄像头捕捉到的图像和长广角彩色摄像头捕捉到的图像进行合成。1418. The electronic device synthesizes the image captured by the camera currently used to capture the image and the image captured by the long wide-angle color camera.
1419、电子设备在触摸屏上显示合成后的图像。1419. The electronic device displays the synthesized image on the touch screen.
若待拍摄对象为风景,则电子设备可以在通过当前用于捕捉图像的摄像头继续捕捉图像的同时,还可以结合超广角彩色摄像头的视场角更广的特性,采集更大视野范围内的风景画面,从而将两个摄像头捕捉的画面进行融合,帮助用户记录更加开阔的风景的画面。If the object to be photographed is a landscape, the electronic device can continue to capture the image through the camera currently used to capture the image, and can also combine the wider field-of-view characteristics of the ultra-wide-angle color camera to capture the landscape within a larger field of view Picture, thus merging the pictures captured by the two cameras to help users record pictures of more open landscapes.
在另一实施例中,该方法还可以包括:In another embodiment, the method may further include:
1420、电子设备检测到用户用于指示录像的第三操作。1420. The electronic device detects a third operation that the user uses to instruct recording.
示例性的,该第三操作可以是用户点击图4A中的录像控件的操作。Exemplarily, the third operation may be an operation in which the user clicks the recording control in FIG. 4A.
1421、电子设备响应于第三操作显示录像模式下的拍摄界面。1421. The electronic device displays the shooting interface in the recording mode in response to the third operation.
1422、电子设备根据待拍摄对象在拍摄界面上的大小,或者根据待拍摄对象与电子设备的距离自动变焦。1422. The electronic device automatically zooms according to the size of the object to be photographed on the shooting interface, or according to the distance between the object to be photographed and the electronic device.
例如,电子设备可以设定待拍摄对象在画面上的参考尺寸,该参考尺寸在拍摄过程中是固定的。在拍摄视频的过程中,电子设备可以根据当前帧拍摄获得的图像中待拍摄对象的实际尺寸与参考尺寸的比例关系确定变焦倍率,自动变焦。For example, the electronic device may set a reference size of the object to be photographed on the screen, and the reference size is fixed during the photographing process. In the process of shooting video, the electronic device can determine the zoom magnification and automatically zoom according to the ratio between the actual size of the object to be shot and the reference size in the image obtained by shooting in the current frame.
再例如,电子设备可以设定待拍摄对象与电子设备的距离的预设值(例如上述预设值1、预设值2或预设值3)。在拍摄视频的过程中,电子设备可以根据当前待拍摄对象与电子设备的距离与预设值的大小关系确定变焦倍率,自动变焦。For another example, the electronic device may set a preset value of the distance between the object to be photographed and the electronic device (eg, the aforementioned
1423、电子设备根据变焦结果自动切换用于捕捉图像的摄像头。1423. The electronic device automatically switches the camera used to capture the image according to the zoom result.
电子设备根据变焦倍率确定拍摄下一帧图像需要使用的摄像头,从而自动切换到变焦倍率对应的摄像头捕捉图像。The electronic device determines the camera to be used for shooting the next image according to the zoom magnification, so as to automatically switch to the camera corresponding to the zoom magnification to capture the image.
在另一实施例中,该方法还包括:电子设备在触摸屏上提示用户当前用于捕捉图像的摄像头、当前的变焦倍率或当前的拍摄模式,以方便用户实时获知当前用于捕捉图像的摄像头和/或当前的变焦倍率。In another embodiment, the method further includes: the electronic device prompts the user on the touch screen of the camera currently used to capture the image, the current zoom magnification or the current shooting mode, so that the user can know the camera currently used to capture the image in real time and / Or the current zoom ratio.
示例性的,参见图7A,电子设备通过显示控件702来提示用户当前的变焦倍率为2×。再示例性的,参见图9B,电子设备通过显示控件902来提示用户当前为超广角拍摄模式。再示例性的,参见图4B,电子设备通过加粗控件405的边框或高亮显示控件405来提示用户当前用于捕捉图像的摄像头为广角彩色摄像头。Exemplarily, referring to FIG. 7A, the electronic device prompts the user through the
可以理解的是,电子设备为了实现上述功能,其包含了执行各个功能相应的硬件和/或软件模块。结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的算法步骤,本申请能够以硬件或硬件和计算机软件的结合形式来实现。某个功能究竟以硬件还是计算机软件驱动硬件的方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。本领域技术人员可以结合实施例对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实 现不应认为超出本申请的范围。It can be understood that, in order to realize the above-mentioned functions, the electronic device includes hardware and / or software modules corresponding to performing each function. With reference to the example algorithm steps described in the embodiments disclosed herein, the present application can be implemented in the form of hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software. Whether a function is executed by hardware or computer software driven hardware depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution. A person skilled in the art may use different methods to implement the described functions for each specific application in combination with the embodiments, but such implementation should not be considered beyond the scope of the present application.
本实施例可以根据上述方法示例对电子设备进行功能模块的划分,例如,可以对应各个功能划分各个功能模块,也可以将两个或两个以上的功能集成在一个处理模块中。上述集成的模块可以采用硬件的形式实现。需要说明的是,本实施例中对模块的划分是示意性的,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式。In this embodiment, the electronic device may be divided into function modules according to the above method examples. For example, each function module may be divided corresponding to each function, or two or more functions may be integrated into one processing module. The above integrated module can be implemented in the form of hardware. It should be noted that the division of the modules in this embodiment is schematic, and is only a division of logical functions. In actual implementation, there may be another division manner.
在采用对应各个功能划分各个功能模块的情况下,图16示出了上述实施例中涉及的电子设备1600的一种可能的组成示意图,如图16所示,该电子设备1600可以包括:检测单元1601、显示单元1602和处理单元1603。In the case where each functional module is divided corresponding to each function, FIG. 16 shows a schematic diagram of a possible composition of the electronic device 1600 involved in the above embodiment. As shown in FIG. 16, the electronic device 1600 may include: a
其中,检测单元1601可以用于支持电子设备1600执行上述步骤1401、步骤1405、步骤1420等,和/或用于本文所描述的技术的其他过程。The
显示单元1602可以用于支持电子设备1600执行上述步骤1402、步骤1404、步骤1407、步骤1419、步骤1421等,和/或用于本文所描述的技术的其他过程。The
处理单元1603可以用于支持电子设备1600执行上述步骤1403、步骤1406、步骤1408-1418、步骤1422、步骤1423等,和/或用于本文所描述的技术的其他过程。The
需要说明的是,上述方法实施例涉及的各步骤的所有相关内容均可以援引到对应功能模块的功能描述,在此不再赘述。It should be noted that all relevant content of the steps involved in the above method embodiments can be referred to the function description of the corresponding function module, which will not be repeated here.
本实施例提供的电子设备,用于执行上述图像捕捉方法,因此可以达到与上述实现方法相同的效果。The electronic device provided in this embodiment is used to execute the above image capturing method, and therefore can achieve the same effect as the above implementation method.
在采用集成的单元的情况下,电子设备可以包括处理模块、存储模块和通信模块。其中,处理模块可以用于对电子设备的动作进行控制管理,例如,可以用于支持电子设备执行上述检测单元1601、显示单元1602和处理单元1603执行的步骤。存储模块可以用于支持电子设备存储摄像头捕捉到的图像,以及存储程序代码和数据等。通信模块,可以用于支持电子设备与其他设备的通信。In the case of using an integrated unit, the electronic device may include a processing module, a storage module, and a communication module. The processing module may be used to control and manage the actions of the electronic device. For example, it may be used to support the electronic device to execute the steps performed by the
其中,处理模块可以是处理器或控制器。其可以实现或执行结合本申请公开内容所描述的各种示例性的逻辑方框,模块和电路。处理器也可以是实现计算功能的组合,例如包含一个或多个微处理器组合,数字信号处理(digital signal processing,DSP)和微处理器的组合等等。存储模块可以是存储器。通信模块具体可以为射频电路、蓝牙芯片、Wi-Fi芯片等与其他电子设备交互的设备。The processing module may be a processor or a controller. It can implement or execute various exemplary logical blocks, modules, and circuits described in conjunction with the disclosure of the present application. The processor may also be a combination of computing functions, such as a combination of one or more microprocessors, a combination of digital signal processing (DSP) and a microprocessor, and so on. The storage module may be a memory. The communication module may specifically be a device that interacts with other electronic devices, such as a radio frequency circuit, a Bluetooth chip, or a Wi-Fi chip.
在一个实施例中,当处理模块为处理器,存储模块为存储器时,本实施例所涉及的电子设备可以为具有图1所示结构的设备。In one embodiment, when the processing module is a processor and the storage module is a memory, the electronic device involved in this embodiment may be a device having the structure shown in FIG. 1.
在本实施例中,一个或多个计算机程序被存储在上述内部存储器121中,并被配置为被一个或多个处理器执行,该一个或多个计算机程序包括指令,在一些实施例中,上述指令可以用于执行如图14及相应实施例中电子设备执行的各个步骤。在其他一些实施例中,上述指令还可以用于执行图15及相应实施例中电子设备执行的各个步骤。In this embodiment, one or more computer programs are stored in the internal memory 121 and configured to be executed by one or more processors. The one or more computer programs include instructions. In some embodiments, The above instructions can be used to execute various steps performed by the electronic device as shown in FIG. 14 and the corresponding embodiments. In some other embodiments, the above instructions may also be used to perform various steps performed by the electronic device in FIG. 15 and the corresponding embodiments.
本实施例还提供一种计算机存储介质,该计算机存储介质中存储有计算机指令,当该计算机指令在电子设备上运行时,使得电子设备执行上述相关方法步骤实现上述实施例中的图像捕捉方法。This embodiment also provides a computer storage medium in which computer instructions are stored. When the computer instructions run on an electronic device, the electronic device executes the above-mentioned related method steps to implement the image capturing method in the above embodiment.
本实施例还提供了一种计算机程序产品,当该计算机程序产品在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行上述相关步骤,以实现上述实施例中的图像捕捉方法。This embodiment also provides a computer program product. When the computer program product runs on a computer, the computer is caused to perform the above-mentioned relevant steps to implement the image capturing method in the above embodiment.
另外,本申请的实施例还提供一种装置,这个装置具体可以是芯片,组件或模块,该装置可包括相连的处理器和存储器;其中,存储器用于存储计算机执行指令,当装置运行时,处理器可执行存储器存储的计算机执行指令,以使芯片执行上述各方法实施例中的图像捕捉方法。In addition, the embodiments of the present application also provide an apparatus. The apparatus may specifically be a chip, a component, or a module. The apparatus may include a connected processor and a memory; wherein the memory is used to store computer-executed instructions. When the apparatus is running, The processor may execute computer execution instructions stored in the memory to cause the chip to execute the image capturing method in each of the above method embodiments.
其中,本实施例提供的电子设备、计算机存储介质、计算机程序产品或芯片均用于执行上文所提供的对应的方法,因此,其所能达到的有益效果可参考上文所提供的对应的方法中的有益效果,此处不再赘述。Among them, the electronic device, computer storage medium, computer program product or chip provided in this embodiment are used to perform the corresponding methods provided above, therefore, for the beneficial effects that can be achieved, refer to the corresponding provided above The beneficial effects of the method will not be repeated here.
通过以上实施方式的描述,所属领域的技术人员可以了解到,为描述的方便和简洁,仅以上述各功能模块的划分进行举例说明,实际应用中,可以根据需要而将上述功能分配由不同的功能模块完成,即将装置的内部结构划分成不同的功能模块,以完成以上描述的全部或者部分功能。Through the description of the above embodiments, those skilled in the art can understand that, for the convenience and conciseness of description, only the above-mentioned division of each functional module is used as an example for illustration. In practical applications, the above-mentioned functions can be assigned by different The functional module is completed, that is, the internal structure of the device is divided into different functional modules to complete all or part of the functions described above.
在以上所提供的几个实施例中,应该理解到,所揭露的装置和方法,可以通过其它的方式实现。例如,以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的,例如,所述模块或单元的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个装置,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。另一点,所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口,装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式。In the several embodiments provided above, it should be understood that the disclosed device and method may be implemented in other ways. For example, the device embodiments described above are only schematic. For example, the division of the modules or units is only a division of logical functions. In actual implementation, there may be other divisions, for example, multiple units or components may be The combination can either be integrated into another device, or some features can be ignored, or not implemented. In addition, the displayed or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,作为单元显示的部件可以是一个物理单元或多个物理单元,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个不同地方。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。The units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may be one physical unit or multiple physical units, that is, may be located in one place, or may be distributed in multiple different places . Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution of this embodiment.
另外,以上各实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中,也可以是各个单元单独物理存在,也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。上述集成的单元既可以采用硬件的形式实现,也可以采用软件功能单元的形式实现。In addition, each functional unit in the above embodiments may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist alone physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit. The above integrated unit can be implemented in the form of hardware or software function unit.
所述集成的单元如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一个可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解,本实施例的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的全部或部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一个设备(可以是单片机,芯片等)或处理器(processor)执行以上各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括:U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(read only memory,ROM)、随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。If the integrated unit is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it may be stored in a readable storage medium. Based on this understanding, the technical solution of this embodiment essentially or part of the contribution to the existing technology or all or part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, which is stored in a storage medium It includes several instructions to enable a device (which may be a single-chip microcomputer, chip, etc.) or processor to execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in the above embodiments. The foregoing storage media include various media that can store program codes, such as a USB flash drive, a mobile hard disk, a read-only memory (ROM), a random access memory (RAM), a magnetic disk, or an optical disk.
以上内容,仅为本实施例的具体实施方式,但本实施例的保护范围并不局限于此,任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本实施例揭露的技术范围内,可轻易想到变化或替换,都应涵盖在本实施例的保护范围之内。因此,本实施例的保护范围应以所述权利要求的保护范围为准。The above is only the specific implementation of this embodiment, but the protection scope of this embodiment is not limited to this, any person skilled in the art in the technical field can easily think of changes or replacements within the technical scope disclosed in this embodiment , Should be covered within the scope of protection of this embodiment. Therefore, the protection scope of this embodiment should be subject to the protection scope of the claims.
Claims (21)
Priority Applications (1)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| CN201980004268.3A CN111183632A (en) | 2018-10-12 | 2019-10-10 | Image capturing method and electronic device |
Applications Claiming Priority (2)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| CN201811190767.X | 2018-10-12 | ||
| CN201811190767.XA CN110248081A (en) | 2018-10-12 | 2018-10-12 | Image capture method and electronic equipment |
Publications (1)
| Publication Number | Publication Date |
|---|---|
| WO2020073959A1 true WO2020073959A1 (en) | 2020-04-16 |
Family
ID=67882390
Family Applications (1)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| PCT/CN2019/110387 Ceased WO2020073959A1 (en) | 2018-10-12 | 2019-10-10 | Image capturing method, and electronic device |
Country Status (2)
| Country | Link |
|---|---|
| CN (2) | CN110248081A (en) |
| WO (1) | WO2020073959A1 (en) |
Cited By (17)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| CN111881845A (en) * | 2020-07-30 | 2020-11-03 | 安徽兰臣信息科技有限公司 | A facial image capture terminal for a business membership system |
| CN113873142A (en) * | 2020-06-30 | 2021-12-31 | Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 | Multimedia processing chip, electronic device and dynamic image processing method |
| CN114445478A (en) * | 2020-11-03 | 2022-05-06 | 华为技术有限公司 | Depth image acquisition method and electronic equipment |
| CN114531578A (en) * | 2020-11-23 | 2022-05-24 | 华为技术有限公司 | Light source spectrum acquisition method and device |
| CN114650364A (en) * | 2020-12-19 | 2022-06-21 | Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 | Device control method, device, wearable device and storage medium |
| CN114694242A (en) * | 2020-12-25 | 2022-07-01 | 华为技术有限公司 | AI identification method, electronic equipment and camera |
| EP4030745A1 (en) * | 2021-01-14 | 2022-07-20 | Beijing Xiaomi Mobile Software Co., Ltd. | A multiple camera system and a method for operating the multiple camera system |
| CN114866680A (en) * | 2021-02-03 | 2022-08-05 | Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 | Image processing method, device, storage medium and electronic device |
| CN116018813A (en) * | 2020-07-06 | 2023-04-25 | 高通股份有限公司 | Automatic camera selection that captures the intended subject in the image |
| CN116095460A (en) * | 2022-05-25 | 2023-05-09 | 荣耀终端有限公司 | Video recording method, device and storage medium |
| CN116347224A (en) * | 2022-10-31 | 2023-06-27 | 荣耀终端有限公司 | Shooting frame rate control method, electronic device, chip system and readable storage medium |
| CN116708751A (en) * | 2022-09-30 | 2023-09-05 | 荣耀终端有限公司 | Method, device and electronic equipment for determining duration of taking photos |
| CN117177062A (en) * | 2022-05-30 | 2023-12-05 | 荣耀终端有限公司 | A camera switching method and electronic device |
| CN117956299A (en) * | 2022-10-29 | 2024-04-30 | 华为技术有限公司 | Method and electronic equipment for photographing the moon |
| US20250106529A1 (en) * | 2022-10-24 | 2025-03-27 | Honor Device Co., Ltd. | Method for switching cameras and electronic device |
| CN119784679A (en) * | 2024-11-26 | 2025-04-08 | 深圳创景数科信息技术有限公司 | Textile fabric identification method, device, equipment and storage medium based on multi-mode model |
| WO2025121406A1 (en) * | 2023-12-07 | 2025-06-12 | Sony Group Corporation | Information processing device, information processing method, and program |
Families Citing this family (49)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| CN110248081A (en) * | 2018-10-12 | 2019-09-17 | 华为技术有限公司 | Image capture method and electronic equipment |
| CN109889751B (en) * | 2019-04-18 | 2020-09-15 | 东北大学 | Portable shooting and recording device for speech content based on optical zooming |
| CN110351487A (en) * | 2019-08-26 | 2019-10-18 | Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 | Control method, control device, electronic apparatus, and storage medium |
| CN110677580B (en) * | 2019-09-24 | 2021-09-28 | 捷开通讯(深圳)有限公司 | Shooting method, shooting device, storage medium and terminal |
| CN110767145B (en) * | 2019-10-24 | 2022-07-26 | 武汉天马微电子有限公司 | Display device and driving method thereof |
| CN111027374B (en) * | 2019-10-28 | 2023-06-30 | 华为终端有限公司 | Image recognition method and electronic equipment |
| CN110809101B (en) * | 2019-11-04 | 2022-05-17 | RealMe重庆移动通信有限公司 | Image zooming processing method and device, electronic equipment and storage medium |
| CN112991242A (en) * | 2019-12-13 | 2021-06-18 | RealMe重庆移动通信有限公司 | Image processing method, image processing apparatus, storage medium, and terminal device |
| CN110993633B (en) * | 2019-12-17 | 2023-06-20 | 武汉芯盈科技有限公司 | Imaging device capable of adjusting pixel size for under-screen fingerprint sensor |
| WO2021134311A1 (en) * | 2019-12-30 | 2021-07-08 | 苏州臻迪智能科技有限公司 | Method and apparatus for switching object to be photographed, and image processing method and apparatus |
| CN111147755B (en) * | 2020-01-02 | 2021-12-31 | 普联技术有限公司 | Zoom processing method and device for double cameras and terminal equipment |
| CN113194242B (en) | 2020-01-14 | 2022-09-20 | 荣耀终端有限公司 | Shooting method in long-focus scene and mobile terminal |
| EP4109875A4 (en) * | 2020-02-21 | 2023-04-26 | Sony Group Corporation | PROGRAM, INFORMATION PROCESSING METHOD AND ELECTRONIC DEVICE |
| CN111294517B (en) | 2020-03-03 | 2021-12-17 | 荣耀终端有限公司 | Image processing method and mobile terminal |
| US12219243B2 (en) | 2020-03-20 | 2025-02-04 | Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. | Shooting preview interface for electronic device with multiple camera |
| CN113497890B (en) * | 2020-03-20 | 2023-04-07 | 华为技术有限公司 | Shooting method and equipment |
| CN111614891B (en) * | 2020-04-24 | 2022-09-16 | 深圳传音控股股份有限公司 | Camera application function switching method, terminal and computer readable storage medium |
| CN113596316B (en) * | 2020-04-30 | 2023-12-08 | 华为技术有限公司 | Photography methods and electronic equipment |
| CN111464752A (en) * | 2020-05-18 | 2020-07-28 | Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 | Zoom control method of electronic device and electronic device |
| CN111654629B (en) * | 2020-06-11 | 2022-06-24 | 展讯通信(上海)有限公司 | Camera switching method and device, electronic equipment and readable storage medium |
| CN113890984B (en) * | 2020-07-03 | 2022-12-27 | 华为技术有限公司 | Photographing method, image processing method and electronic equipment |
| CN111787224B (en) * | 2020-07-10 | 2022-07-12 | 深圳传音控股股份有限公司 | Image acquisition method, terminal device and computer-readable storage medium |
| JP7566522B2 (en) * | 2020-07-22 | 2024-10-15 | キヤノン株式会社 | Electronic device and control method thereof |
| CN111866388B (en) * | 2020-07-29 | 2022-07-12 | 努比亚技术有限公司 | Multiple exposure shooting method, equipment and computer readable storage medium |
| WO2022022715A1 (en) * | 2020-07-30 | 2022-02-03 | 华为技术有限公司 | Photographing method and device |
| CN111970438B (en) * | 2020-08-03 | 2022-06-28 | Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 | Zoom processing method and device, equipment and storage medium |
| CN112073642B (en) * | 2020-09-18 | 2021-09-14 | 展讯通信(上海)有限公司 | Video recording method and device of multi-camera equipment, storage medium and terminal |
| CN112333388B (en) * | 2020-10-30 | 2022-04-12 | 维沃移动通信(杭州)有限公司 | Image display method and device and electronic equipment |
| CN117880634A (en) * | 2020-11-30 | 2024-04-12 | 华为技术有限公司 | Method for shooting video and electronic device |
| CN112866576B (en) * | 2021-01-18 | 2022-05-17 | Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 | Image preview method, storage medium and display device |
| CN112784819A (en) * | 2021-03-05 | 2021-05-11 | 上海钜星科技有限公司 | Method for increasing effective distance between face recognition and license plate recognition of police helmet |
| CN113242383B (en) * | 2021-03-11 | 2022-04-29 | 海信视像科技股份有限公司 | Display device and image calibration method for automatic focusing imaging of display device |
| CN115134584A (en) * | 2021-03-29 | 2022-09-30 | 北京小米移动软件有限公司 | Camera module testing method, camera module testing device and storage medium |
| CN115150540B (en) * | 2021-03-30 | 2023-10-24 | 华为技术有限公司 | Photography method, terminal equipment and computer-readable storage medium |
| CN115150543B (en) * | 2021-03-31 | 2024-04-16 | 华为技术有限公司 | Shooting method, shooting device, electronic equipment and readable storage medium |
| CN115225800B (en) * | 2021-04-14 | 2024-03-05 | 华为技术有限公司 | Multi-camera zoom method, device and equipment |
| CN113364975B (en) | 2021-05-10 | 2022-05-20 | 荣耀终端有限公司 | Image fusion method and electronic equipment |
| CN113747028B (en) * | 2021-06-15 | 2024-03-15 | 荣耀终端有限公司 | Photography method and electronic equipment |
| CN115567763A (en) * | 2021-07-02 | 2023-01-03 | 北京小米移动软件有限公司 | Monitoring method, monitoring device and readable storage medium |
| CN118317205B (en) * | 2021-08-12 | 2025-04-04 | 荣耀终端股份有限公司 | Image processing method and terminal device |
| CN113747065B (en) * | 2021-09-03 | 2023-12-26 | 维沃移动通信(杭州)有限公司 | Shooting method and device and electronic equipment |
| CN116546316B (en) * | 2022-01-25 | 2023-12-08 | 荣耀终端有限公司 | Method for switching cameras and electronic equipment |
| CN116939357A (en) * | 2022-04-02 | 2023-10-24 | 华为技术有限公司 | Macro shooting method, electronic equipment and computer readable storage medium |
| CN116703718B (en) * | 2022-09-08 | 2024-03-22 | 荣耀终端有限公司 | Image magnification method and electronic device |
| CN116709018B (en) * | 2022-10-14 | 2024-04-09 | 荣耀终端有限公司 | Zoom bar segmentation method and electronic device |
| CN118075609A (en) * | 2022-11-22 | 2024-05-24 | 荣耀终端有限公司 | Shooting method, graphical interface and electronic equipment |
| CN116708954B (en) * | 2022-12-30 | 2024-06-11 | 荣耀终端有限公司 | Photographing method and electronic device |
| CN116320743A (en) * | 2023-02-28 | 2023-06-23 | 阿里巴巴(中国)有限公司 | Object recognition method, device, electronic device and computer storage medium |
| CN117354624B (en) * | 2023-12-06 | 2024-06-21 | 荣耀终端有限公司 | Camera switching method, device and storage medium |
Citations (8)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| US20150002724A1 (en) * | 2013-06-27 | 2015-01-01 | Altek Semiconductor Corp. | Method for adjusting focus position and electronic apparatus |
| CN104363379A (en) * | 2014-11-28 | 2015-02-18 | 广东欧珀移动通信有限公司 | Shooting method by use of cameras with different focal lengths and terminal |
| CN204392356U (en) * | 2015-03-12 | 2015-06-10 | 王欣东 | A kind of mobile phone with multiple different fixed focal length camera |
| CN106454132A (en) * | 2016-11-29 | 2017-02-22 | 广东欧珀移动通信有限公司 | Control method, control device and electronic device |
| CN106527943A (en) * | 2016-11-04 | 2017-03-22 | 上海传英信息技术有限公司 | Camera switching method and mobile terminal |
| CN107800951A (en) * | 2016-09-07 | 2018-03-13 | 深圳富泰宏精密工业有限公司 | Electronic installation and its Shot change method |
| CN108540711A (en) * | 2017-03-03 | 2018-09-14 | 上海传英信息技术有限公司 | Mobile terminal and its image pickup method |
| CN110248081A (en) * | 2018-10-12 | 2019-09-17 | 华为技术有限公司 | Image capture method and electronic equipment |
Family Cites Families (6)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| JP6249202B2 (en) * | 2013-05-10 | 2017-12-20 | ソニー株式会社 | Image display device, image display method, and program |
| JP2016191754A (en) * | 2015-03-31 | 2016-11-10 | キヤノン株式会社 | Zoom lens |
| CN105049711B (en) * | 2015-06-30 | 2018-09-04 | 广东欧珀移动通信有限公司 | A kind of photographic method and user terminal |
| CN106851107A (en) * | 2017-03-09 | 2017-06-13 | 广东欧珀移动通信有限公司 | Control method, control device and electronic device for switching camera auxiliary composition |
| CN107509032A (en) * | 2017-09-08 | 2017-12-22 | 维沃移动通信有限公司 | A camera reminder method and mobile terminal |
| CN107835364A (en) * | 2017-10-30 | 2018-03-23 | 维沃移动通信有限公司 | One kind is taken pictures householder method and mobile terminal |
-
2018
- 2018-10-12 CN CN201811190767.XA patent/CN110248081A/en active Pending
-
2019
- 2019-10-10 WO PCT/CN2019/110387 patent/WO2020073959A1/en not_active Ceased
- 2019-10-10 CN CN201980004268.3A patent/CN111183632A/en active Pending
Patent Citations (8)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| US20150002724A1 (en) * | 2013-06-27 | 2015-01-01 | Altek Semiconductor Corp. | Method for adjusting focus position and electronic apparatus |
| CN104363379A (en) * | 2014-11-28 | 2015-02-18 | 广东欧珀移动通信有限公司 | Shooting method by use of cameras with different focal lengths and terminal |
| CN204392356U (en) * | 2015-03-12 | 2015-06-10 | 王欣东 | A kind of mobile phone with multiple different fixed focal length camera |
| CN107800951A (en) * | 2016-09-07 | 2018-03-13 | 深圳富泰宏精密工业有限公司 | Electronic installation and its Shot change method |
| CN106527943A (en) * | 2016-11-04 | 2017-03-22 | 上海传英信息技术有限公司 | Camera switching method and mobile terminal |
| CN106454132A (en) * | 2016-11-29 | 2017-02-22 | 广东欧珀移动通信有限公司 | Control method, control device and electronic device |
| CN108540711A (en) * | 2017-03-03 | 2018-09-14 | 上海传英信息技术有限公司 | Mobile terminal and its image pickup method |
| CN110248081A (en) * | 2018-10-12 | 2019-09-17 | 华为技术有限公司 | Image capture method and electronic equipment |
Cited By (25)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| CN113873142A (en) * | 2020-06-30 | 2021-12-31 | Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 | Multimedia processing chip, electronic device and dynamic image processing method |
| CN113873142B (en) * | 2020-06-30 | 2023-07-25 | Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 | Multimedia processing chip, electronic device and dynamic image processing method |
| CN116018813A (en) * | 2020-07-06 | 2023-04-25 | 高通股份有限公司 | Automatic camera selection that captures the intended subject in the image |
| CN111881845A (en) * | 2020-07-30 | 2020-11-03 | 安徽兰臣信息科技有限公司 | A facial image capture terminal for a business membership system |
| CN111881845B (en) * | 2020-07-30 | 2024-03-01 | 苏州玥林信息科技有限公司 | Face image capturing terminal of business member system |
| CN114445478A (en) * | 2020-11-03 | 2022-05-06 | 华为技术有限公司 | Depth image acquisition method and electronic equipment |
| CN114531578B (en) * | 2020-11-23 | 2023-11-07 | 华为技术有限公司 | Light source spectrum acquisition method and device |
| CN114531578A (en) * | 2020-11-23 | 2022-05-24 | 华为技术有限公司 | Light source spectrum acquisition method and device |
| CN114650364A (en) * | 2020-12-19 | 2022-06-21 | Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 | Device control method, device, wearable device and storage medium |
| CN114694242B (en) * | 2020-12-25 | 2024-06-04 | 华为技术有限公司 | AI identification method, electronic equipment and camera |
| CN114694242A (en) * | 2020-12-25 | 2022-07-01 | 华为技术有限公司 | AI identification method, electronic equipment and camera |
| EP4030745A1 (en) * | 2021-01-14 | 2022-07-20 | Beijing Xiaomi Mobile Software Co., Ltd. | A multiple camera system and a method for operating the multiple camera system |
| CN114866680A (en) * | 2021-02-03 | 2022-08-05 | Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 | Image processing method, device, storage medium and electronic device |
| CN114866680B (en) * | 2021-02-03 | 2024-02-02 | Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 | Image processing methods, devices, storage media and electronic equipment |
| CN116095460A (en) * | 2022-05-25 | 2023-05-09 | 荣耀终端有限公司 | Video recording method, device and storage medium |
| CN116095460B (en) * | 2022-05-25 | 2023-11-21 | 荣耀终端有限公司 | Video recording method, device and storage medium |
| CN117177062A (en) * | 2022-05-30 | 2023-12-05 | 荣耀终端有限公司 | A camera switching method and electronic device |
| CN116708751A (en) * | 2022-09-30 | 2023-09-05 | 荣耀终端有限公司 | Method, device and electronic equipment for determining duration of taking photos |
| CN116708751B (en) * | 2022-09-30 | 2024-02-27 | 荣耀终端有限公司 | A method, device and electronic equipment for determining the duration of taking pictures |
| US20250106529A1 (en) * | 2022-10-24 | 2025-03-27 | Honor Device Co., Ltd. | Method for switching cameras and electronic device |
| CN117956299A (en) * | 2022-10-29 | 2024-04-30 | 华为技术有限公司 | Method and electronic equipment for photographing the moon |
| CN116347224B (en) * | 2022-10-31 | 2023-11-21 | 荣耀终端有限公司 | Shooting frame rate control method, electronic device, chip system and readable storage medium |
| CN116347224A (en) * | 2022-10-31 | 2023-06-27 | 荣耀终端有限公司 | Shooting frame rate control method, electronic device, chip system and readable storage medium |
| WO2025121406A1 (en) * | 2023-12-07 | 2025-06-12 | Sony Group Corporation | Information processing device, information processing method, and program |
| CN119784679A (en) * | 2024-11-26 | 2025-04-08 | 深圳创景数科信息技术有限公司 | Textile fabric identification method, device, equipment and storage medium based on multi-mode model |
Also Published As
| Publication number | Publication date |
|---|---|
| CN111183632A (en) | 2020-05-19 |
| CN110248081A (en) | 2019-09-17 |
Similar Documents
| Publication | Publication Date | Title |
|---|---|---|
| US11785329B2 (en) | Camera switching method for terminal, and terminal | |
| WO2020073959A1 (en) | Image capturing method, and electronic device | |
| US12192614B2 (en) | Photographing method in long-focus scenario and terminal | |
| CN109951633B (en) | Method for shooting moon and electronic equipment | |
| WO2021093793A1 (en) | Capturing method and electronic device | |
| CN112887583B (en) | Shooting method and electronic equipment | |
| CN115967851B (en) | Fast photographing method, electronic device and computer-readable storage medium | |
| CN114679537A (en) | A shooting method and terminal | |
| CN112954218A (en) | Multi-channel video recording method and equipment | |
| US12301988B2 (en) | Focusing method and electronic device | |
| CN116709018B (en) | Zoom bar segmentation method and electronic device | |
| CN119027541A (en) | Dynamic photo editing method and related device | |
| CN120128790A (en) | A camera request processing method and related device | |
| CN119027540A (en) | Dynamic photo editing method and related device |
Legal Events
| Date | Code | Title | Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| 121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 19872056 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |
|
| NENP | Non-entry into the national phase |
Ref country code: DE |
|
| 122 | Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase |
Ref document number: 19872056 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |